JP2019217003A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a game in an appropriate regular number.SOLUTION: In AT, a game can be started when tokens in regular number, at least one of a plurality of regular numbers, "2" or "3". In AT, information corresponding to the regular number can be displayed to a display part. In AT, when information corresponding to the regular number is displayed to the prescribed display part, instruction regular number display data is stored as display data of the prescribed display part at prescribed timing after all reels are stopped before on of a start switch is detected (step S322 while a game start set is processed). When information corresponding to the regular number is displayed, it is displayed in a display mode identifiable as pressing order instruction information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine has been known as one of gaming machines (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-214434

  The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (the configuration of a corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). The invention according to the first claim of the present application corresponds to the first invention 11 among the first inventions 14 to be described later.
The present invention (twelfth embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying an operation mode of a stop button (stop switch 42);
When notifying the operation mode in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquisition number display LED 78),
In the notification game state, a game can be started when at least one of a plurality of prescribed numbers ("2" or "3") is entered.
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a prescribed number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit,
When the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit in the notification game state, a predetermined timing (from FIG. 42) until the start switch is turned on after all the reels stop. , Displayed in step S322),
When the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, the information corresponding to the operation mode is displayed in a display mode that can be identified (when the specified number is “2”, “0A” is displayed). Features.

  According to the present invention, the performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

In this embodiment, it is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine which is an example of a gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a front view illustrating a state in which medals inserted from a medal insertion slot pass through an insertion sensor in the embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when a power failure occurs in a first embodiment (A) using a time chart. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a throw-in sensor and passing of a medal in the first embodiment (B). It is a figure explaining ON / OFF of a making sensor in a 1st embodiment (B) with a time chart. It is a schematic diagram when a medal is discharged from a medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). It is a schematic diagram which shows the state of ON (detection) / OFF (non-detection) of a payout sensor when a medal is delivered from a medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). It is a figure which shows ON / OFF of a payout sensor with a time chart in 1st Embodiment (C). FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a main control board and a board case in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case accommodating a main control board. (B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 1 of a gate mark. (C) is an AA arrow sectional view showing Example 2 of the gate mark. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flow of processing when a disconnection occurs between a main control board and a sub control board in the third embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is sectional drawing (schematic diagram) explaining movement of the stop button of a stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, (b) shows when a detection sensor turns from OFF to ON. (C) shows a state where the stop button is pushed to the deepest part, and (d) shows a state where the push of the stop button is released and the detection sensor is turned off from on. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing in a time chart the relationship between the movement of the stop button and the excitation state of the motor, wherein (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. In the fifth embodiment, it is a diagram showing a time chart of the relationship between the power on / off and the voltage level, wherein (a) shows a power interruption after starting the main program, and (b) shows a state before the main program starts. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state before the last discharged medal contacts the fixed axis and the movable axis, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing apparatus in which the last discharged medal is the fixed axis and the movable axis. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state before the contact with the movable shaft and in which the rotation of the hopper disk has advanced from (a). In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state where the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed axis and the movable axis, and (b) is movable by being pushed by the last discharged medal. It is a top view of a medal payout device showing a state where an axis has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a state after ejecting the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout apparatus which shows the state where rotation of a hopper disk stopped. It is a time chart which shows the relation between the drive signal of a hopper motor, the drive state of a hopper motor, and the discharge | emission state of the medal from a discharge part in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a relationship among an operation of a main control board, a driving state of a hopper motor, a detection state of a payout sensor, and a medal ejection timing in a sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 24 is a side sectional view of the slot machine with a front door closed in a seventh embodiment, illustrating a positional relationship between a main control board and a sub control board. In the seventh embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a main CPU on a main control board and an electrolytic capacitor on a sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed, and FIG. ) Shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. In the seventh embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a main CPU on a main control board and an electrolytic capacitor on a sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed, and FIG. ) Shows Example 3 and (d) shows Example 4. FIG. 23 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion of the slot machine (A in FIG. 22) of the slot machine in a state where the front door is closed in the eighth embodiment, illustrating a gap between the cabinet and the front door. is there. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special roles (gears) and termination conditions, (b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state, (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal drawing in the setting 1, and the advantageous section drawing. It is a figure showing an effect determination table used for non-RT and RT (non-AT) in the ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing an effect determination table used in RB inside and BB inside in a ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing example 1 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED in a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED in a 10th embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display substrate, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs, and (C) is a diagram showing set value display LEDs. It is. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an output port in an 11th embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating addresses, label names, names, and the like of data stored in the RWM. It is a figure explaining the concept of a difference number counter value, (a) shows example 1, and (b) shows example 2. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a difference number counter value and an advantageous area, (a) shows the example 1 and (b) shows the example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the program start process (M_PRG_START) by a main control board. 39 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a power return process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in an eleventh embodiment. 41 is a flowchart showing a game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG. 41. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section shift lottery process in step S283 in FIG. 41. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section shift process in step S347 of FIG. 44. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an AT lottery process in step S355 of FIG. 45. 46 is a flowchart showing an AT initial game frequency determination process in step S363 in FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41. 41 is a flowchart showing medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41. 51 is a flowchart illustrating Example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 in FIG. 50. 51 is a flowchart illustrating Example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 in FIG. 50. It is a flowchart which shows an interruption process (I_INTR). 54 is a flowchart showing a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 in FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sub difference number counter management process in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a sub difference counter management process in the eleventh embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 56. In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the accessory condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the specified number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. It is the front view, top view, and right side view which show the outline | summary of a structure containing the reel and the stop switch in 13th Embodiment.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“Bet” refers to betting a medal (game medium) to play a game. In order to bet a medal, an actual medal is put in through the medal insertion slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet a credited (reserved) medal.
On the other hand, “credit (also referred to as“ storage ”)” means storing medals inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above “bet”. In this specification, “credit” is used in a sense that does not include “bet”.
Further, “insert” means to bet or credit a medal.
The “specified number” refers to the number of bets that can start (execute) a game in the game. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of “2” or “3”, a game can be started with either a bet number of “2” or “3” and cannot be played with a bet number of “1”.
For convenience of explanation, the “specified number” may be referred to as the “bet number”.
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may indicate a value other than the "specified number". For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", at the time when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the bet number is "1" (the number bet at that time).

“Care” means that a player inserts medals from a medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
The “care bet” means that a player bets a medal by cleaning the medal from the medal slot 47.
“Care credit” means that the player credits medals by adding medals through the medal slot 47 (adds credits).
“Bet medal” refers to a medal that is bet.
“Stored medals” refers to medals that have been credited (stored).

A “reserved bet” is a method in which a player operates a bet switch 40 (described later) to bet a part or all of credited medals in order to play a game within a range where the player can bet on the game. To do.
The “auto bet” means that, when a replay is won, the number of medals previously bet in the game is automatically bet by the control processing of the slot machine 10.
Here, the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that the symbol combination has stopped at the activated line; the same applies hereinafter) is referred to as "small combination winning". On the other hand, in the “Rules on Approval of Gaming Machines and Verification of Model Types (hereinafter, simply referred to as“ rules ”), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the condition device related to the replay is activated. Is not interpreted as "winning". However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replaying win), and the stop of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay may be referred to as “replay winning”.
“Payment” refers to paying out a bet medal and / or a stored medal to a player. In the present embodiment, the settlement process is executed when a settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

The term “payout” refers to paying out medals to a player based on winning of a winning or paying out medals by the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out the medals to the player based on the winning of the role, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)), and paying out. Includes both paying out the actual medals from the mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled, for example, such that “50” credits are set as the limit number, and medals whose credits exceed “50” are actually paid out to the player.
Note that “payout” may be referred to as “grant”. Therefore, the “number of payouts” may be referred to as the “number of grants”.

The “game medium” is a medal in the present embodiment, but, for example, in the case of an enclosure type (ECO) game machine, electronic information (electronic medal, electronic data) is used as a game medium. In addition, "electronic information" means, for example, when money (banknote) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played by a gaming machine. That can be credited to a gaming machine as a game medium for performing the game.
The “game medium” may be referred to as “game value”.

  In the case where the game medium is electronic information, “payout of medals” means credit (addition) to the game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "payout of medals" does not only mean that medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later), but the electronic information of the payout corresponding to the winning combination is credited to the gaming media credit device. Addition) is also included.

  In the case where the game progresses as “N−1” game eyes, “N” game eyes, “N + 1” game eyes,... (“N” is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is “N” games. When it is an eye, the game of the “N” game eye is referred to as “this game”. Also, the game of the “N−1” game eye is referred to as “previous game”. Further, the game of the “N + 1” game is referred to as “next game”.

In this specification, a numerical value with “(B)” appended to the end of a number (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with “(H)” added to the end of the numerical value means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in decimal is expressed as “00010000 (B)” in binary, and is expressed as “10 (H)” in hexadecimal. Numerical values indicating decimal numbers are described as “16 (D)” as necessary.
However, when it is clear which of a binary number, a decimal number, and a hexadecimal number, the end symbols of “(B)”, “(D)”, and “(H)” may be omitted. .

The “operation mode” of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the active line).
The “advantageous operation mode” of the stop switch 42 refers to a game having payouts or a large number of payouts in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage / disadvantage in a game result (a symbol combination stopped on an active line). An operation mode in which a symbol combination is stopped, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts to a favorable RT (promotion) is stopped, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not shift to a disadvantageous RT (fall) is stopped. The “advantageous operation mode” is also referred to as a correct operation mode and a correct push order.

  "A game in which an advantage / disadvantage occurs in the game result by the operation mode of the stop switch 42" is, for example, a game (a so-called "push order bell") that has been won in one of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. Game). In addition, although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game that has been won in a plurality of types of replays (at the time of a duplicate replay win; a game that has been won in a so-called “push order replay”), the RT shifts according to the type of the winning replay. Is also the case.

The “instruction function” means a function of instructing the operation mode of the stop switch 42 to the player. The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "pointing function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
Note that displaying the contents of the “instruction” so as to be visible is “display”, and informing the player of the contents of the instruction is “notification”. Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. Then, the notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be “actuation of the instruction function”, but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is “instruction of the instruction function”. Operation ".
For example, when the pressing order bells shown in winning numbers “3” to “8” in FIG. 58B described later are in the 6-selection pressing order, the payout at the time of winning the pressing order bell is 10 or 10 in the example of FIG. Although it is one, it is assumed that, instead of this, one of three, four, ten, or missing (non-winning) is determined according to the pressing order.
Here, the notification of the pressing order for winning the ten-prize combination is a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and naturally corresponds to the “operation of the instruction function”.
On the other hand, the notification of the pressing order for winning the one-part, three-part, or four-part combinations may be referred to as “notification of an advantageous operation mode (operation of the instruction function)”, or “advantageous operation mode”. Notification ".

The pressing order for making the four winning combinations win is not the most advantageous operation mode since it is the pressing order in which the ten winning combinations do not win. However, since the payout number is "4" with respect to the bet number "3" and the difference number of the game is "+1", this is an operation mode for increasing the difference page number, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pressing order for winning three winning combinations is a pressing order for not winning ten winning combinations, and is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, since the payout number is “3” with respect to the bet number “3” and the difference number is maintained as it is (the difference number is not reduced), it is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation state.

  Further, similarly, the pressing order for winning one winning combination is a pressing order for not winning ten winning combinations, and is not the most advantageous operation mode. Further, the payout number is “1” with respect to the bet number “3”, and this is an operation mode for reducing the difference number. However, it can be said that it is an operation mode in which the role is not lost, and thus it may not be said that it is an disadvantageous operation mode.

In the present embodiment, in the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the pushing order bell, the operating mode (correct answering order) in which the winning combination with the largest payout number wins is notified.
However, for example, when the difference sheet counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value (“2400 (D)”), but there is room for the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (the advantageous section clear counter value described later). It is conceivable that, when the push order bell is won, the push order in which, for example, three or four winning combinations are won as described above is notified, and the difference counter value is controlled so as to be maintained as it is.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, it is assumed that the specified number for activating the instruction function is set to “3”. In this case, in the game of the specified number “2” or “3” in the AT, the game is started with the bet number “3”, and when the push bell is won, the instruction function can be operated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number “2”, the instruction function cannot be operated even when the pressing order bell is won.

The “game section” includes a “normal section (non-advantaged section)” and an “advantaged section”. At Unit 5.9, a “standby section” (a game section that was won in the advantageous section lottery but has not yet shifted to an advantageous section) was provided. Is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game section other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
The “normal section” is a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a push order instruction number or a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct answer push order), which will be described later. ) Is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted and does not affect the performance of the instruction function at all (does not execute the processing of the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of the winning combination, it is possible to determine whether to shift to the advantageous section (lottery or the like).

  In the normal section, since the indicating function must not be operated, it is impossible to display the pressing order indicating information on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the indicating function is not provided. Is not transmitted to the peripheral board, so that it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, the “advantage section” is a game section having the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction on the main control board 60 is performed. Only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (the operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified, it indicates a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (or displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that is contrary to the content of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Also, the advantageous section may be a game in which the operation result of the stop switch 42 gives an advantage / disadvantage to the game result, or the instruction function may not be operated.
On the other hand, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 gives an advantage / disadvantage to the game result during the advantageous section, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be displayed by always operating the instruction function.
AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the operation result of the stop switch 42 gives an advantage / disadvantage to the game result. Therefore, the AT is always in the advantageous section, and the AT is not executed during the non-advantage section.

The AT may always (at 100%) notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which the operation result of the stop switch 42 has an advantage / disadvantage in the game result. Even in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage / disadvantage due to the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be notified so that the operation mode of the stop switch 42 falls within the range defined by the rules.
For example, if the number of AT games approaches the upper limit value during the AT but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not temporarily notified from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. It is also conceivable that the indicating function is not activated.

  Further, the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT can be variously set. For example, firstly, setting "advantageous section = AT" can be cited. In this case, winning in the advantageous section is equivalent to winning in AT. Then, the AT starts from the first game in the advantageous section. AT ends with the end of the advantageous section.

Second, it is set to “AT @ advantageous section”.
In this case, the start (execution) condition of the AT is not satisfied only by shifting to the advantageous section, and whether to execute the AT is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that the AT is in the advantageous section. If it is decided to execute, the AT is executed until a predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when it is non-AT at the time of shifting to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to a normal section, a precursor, CZ (a chance zone (a period during which the player can easily win the AT)) and the like.

When a transition is made to the precursor after the transition to the advantageous section, the transition to the AT may be made after the predetermined number of game times of the precursor is completed. Alternatively, at the time of transition to the advantageous section or after the transition to the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether to use the precursor or the gaseous precursor, and if the precursor is determined, the process may shift to the AT after the completion of the precursor. . Further, when it is determined to be a gaseous sign, after the gaseous sign has ended, the advantageous section may be maintained, or a transition to a normal section may be made.
Furthermore, when the termination condition of the AT is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, when the AT ends but the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when the AT is started simultaneously with the advantageous section.

Another example is that the number of games in the advantageous section is determined when the advantageous section is started, and the lottery or the like for the advantageous section is not executed during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section is started, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is determined whether the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section is added (added) (lottery or the like). It is mentioned.
Further, a predetermined ending condition is defined for the advantageous section, and when the predetermined ending condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or the remaining number of games in the AT) is present, To end the advantageous section.

  Here, the “predetermined end condition” of the advantageous section means that the difference number counter value described later has exceeded “2400 (D)” or the advantageous section clear counter (the number of games in the advantageous section) described later has “ 1500 (D) ". When any of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and the game shifts from the next game to the normal section (non-advantaged section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as “section indicator”) 77 described later is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be constantly lit during the advantageous section, but may be lit when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section.
Here, the “predetermined lighting condition” is, for example, a time when the instruction function is activated in a gaming state that is an advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”. After the advantageous section display LED 77 is once turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

The “section Sim (simulation) payout rate” means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even when the combination of “PB ≠ 1” is won, the symbol corresponding to the combination) When the combination is assumed to be stopped) and there are a plurality of types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the most advantageous symbol combination for the player (the highest-level bell which becomes the maximum payout when the push-bell is elected) is selected. This is the payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. In the calculation of the section Sim payout rate, payouts (payout number) due to the operation of the accessory (eg, 1BB operation) are not included. In the game won in the replay, when the bet number is “3”, the payout number is counted as “0”, and in the replay game based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game won in the replay), the bet number is counted. It is calculated as “0” and the number of payouts “x” (“x” is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the payout number of the game won in the replay and the bet number of the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the “game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds“ 1 ”” includes an RT or main game state in which the section Sim payout rate is set to exceed “1”.
Here, the RT in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1” includes, for example, an RT set with a high replay winning probability.
Further, assuming that a CZ (chance zone), an AT, a withdrawal section, and the like are usually provided as the main game state, the main game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1” includes the AT.

  When the advantageous section is ended, more specifically, in the last game of the advantageous section, for example, at the time of a game end check process to be described later, or during a game start set process in the next game of the last game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. I do. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off by executing initialization processing of the advantageous section display LED flag described later in the subsequent interrupt processing.

The “processing relating to the advantageous section” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) (Transition) lottery of the advantageous section 2) Update (subtraction, clear) of the advantageous section clear counter
3) Update of difference counter (calculation, clear)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Further, the “processing related to the instruction function” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of the number-of-games management type AT (specification of terminating the AT when the number of remaining games becomes "0"), updating the AT game number counter (subtraction, additional addition, clearing)
4) In the case of the difference number management type AT (the specification for terminating the AT when the remaining difference number becomes “0”), updating (subtraction, additional addition, clearing) of the AT difference number counter

Then, according to the rules at the present time, it is determined that the processing relating to the advantageous section and the processing relating to the instruction function can be executed by one specified number in one game state (RT) except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specified number “3” enables the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number “2” cannot perform the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function. It was.
However, during the advantageous section, the updating of the advantageous section clear counter and the updating of the difference number counter need to be executed regardless of the specified number.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning combination lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is “0” in FIGS. 26 and 58 described later), in other words, in the game when the condition device is not operated, It is determined that the process relating to the advantageous section (the advantageous section shift lottery) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process relating to the advantageous section may be executed even if the winning combination drawing result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the winning lottery result is non-winning, if the non-winning probability is equal to or more than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, “1/17500” or more), the instruction function is related. Processing (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous section shift lottery (processing relating to the advantageous section), if the winning is achieved in the advantageous section shift lottery, the next game is an advantageous section. Therefore, it is not possible to execute the advantageous section shift lottery (the processing relating to the advantageous section) and execute the notification of the correct answer pressing order (the processing relating to the instruction function) in the game that has been won in the advantageous section.
However, the advantage section shift lottery (processing relating to the advantage section) and the AT lottery (processing relating to the instruction function) may be performed in one game. Further, for example, when a particular winning combination result is obtained, the advantageous section and the AT may be determined (without performing the lottery).

  The management information display LED (also referred to as a “ratio monitor” or “ratio display”) 74 includes, for example, four LEDs as shown in FIG. It is composed of an LED that indicates which of the items it is, by a predetermined symbol or the like, and a two-digit ratio seg (an LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) Or the instruction-containing bonus ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) The continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Characters ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Ratio of consecutive characters (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Combination ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, in the case of displaying the accessory ratio (total), if the ratio is “50”%, the symbol “7A.” Indicating the accessory ratio (total) is displayed on the identification segment, and “50” is displayed. Display on the ratio segment.
Here, the “total” refers to the sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, counting is performed until the number of games reaches at least “175000”. When the total is less than "175000" games, the ratio is displayed by blinking display, for example, and when the total is "175000" or more games, the ratio is displayed by lighting display. Even after the number of games reaches “175000” or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
In addition, “6000 games” is the number of games in which one set is “400” games, and the 15 sets are totaled.

The “advantageous section ratio” indicates a ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all game sections (non-advantaged section + advantaged section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games in all the game sections is “1000” and the number of games in the advantageous section therebetween is “700”, the advantageous section ratio is “70%”.
Further, the “instruction-in-completion bonus ratio” is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts at the time of operating the accessory and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In the slot machine without the accessory, the “instruction-containing accessory ratio” is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-added accessory counter.

Further, the “number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated” is determined based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in accordance with the pressing order displayed by the activation of the instruction function, for example, a winning number “ When the 10 bells of "3" to "8" have won, "10" is added to the designated accessory counter.
On the other hand, in the game in which the indicating function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the displayed pressing order, when one bell in the example of FIG. Is added to "1".
Similarly, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the displayed pressing order, and the winning combination is missed (when the combination is not winning), the instruction-incorporated bonus counter is provided. Is not added to In other words, the count value of the previous game remains.

  In the example of FIG. 26 described later, when the common bell (winning number “3”) is won during the AT, the instruction function is operated in the same manner as when the pressing order bell is won, and the acquired number display LED 78 is pressed. There are a case where the order instruction information (dummy) is displayed and a case where the instruction function is not operated. Then, when the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the common bell, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-containing bonus counter.

  On the other hand, if the instruction function is not activated when the common bell is won, the payout number of the game is not added to the instruction-incorporated bonus counter. However, the total number of payouts is added to the counter. In this case, the case where the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct answer pressing order by an image or a sound is also included.

The “continuous bonus ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the special type 1 (RB) to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it indicates “the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts”.
For example, when the total number of payouts in the number of games of “6000” is “2000”, and when the number of payouts when the “first-class special role (RB)” is activated is “500”, “continuous role The ratio (6000 games) "is" 25 (%) ".

Further, the “principal item ratio” indicates a ratio of the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the accessory to the total number of payouts. Here, the "casing" refers to a special-casing for the second kind (CB) or MB (also referred to as 2BB) in addition to the special-casing for the first-class. Are operated continuously.) And SB (single bonus) are included.
In the above-mentioned five items, in a gaming machine that does not have a function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is displayed as “-−”.
For example, if "RB (Type 1 special specialty)" is not provided, there is no continuous specialty ratio, so that when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is changed to "----". Is lit.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, which will be described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. I do.

In addition, the rule that the advantageous section ratio and the designated accessory ratio should be 70% or less is specified. Further, it describes that the ratio of the accessory should be 70% or less, and specifies that the ratio of the continuous accessory should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the rule range.

It should be noted that a gaming machine having the advantageous section ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a gaming machine having a designated incoming character ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. In a gaming machine having an advantageous section, it is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the “7U” type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the “7P” type, the instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the “7U” type, the ratio of the advantageous section to all the game sections needs to be “70”% or less. In the “7P” type, the number of payouts paid out by the operation of the instruction function and the accessory is total. The payout number may be 70% or less, and may be, for example, an entire period or most of the game section is an advantageous section.

For example, when shifting to a non-advantageous section, it is set so as to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of 100%, and set so as to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). Or setting to win the advantageous section lottery with a high probability (for example, 70%).
The “7U” type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery) by referring to the setting value itself, whereas the “7P” type performs processing related to the instruction function by referring to the setting value itself. It is possible.
In a twelfth embodiment described later, most of the inside of the BB2 is in the advantageous section, and a lottery is performed in the advantageous section to determine whether or not to execute the AT.

Further, the management information display LED 74 is applicable to a pachinko gaming machine as a performance display monitor.
The management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) in this case is composed of a two-digit identification seg and a two-digit ratio seg, as in the case of the slot machine (turn-type gaming machine). Then, a real-time (during measurement) base value for each of the "60000" out spheres (the "base value" indicates the number of safe spheres for 100 out spheres) and "60000" The base values before, once, twice, and three times before are individually displayed. For example, the identification seg of the base value in real time is displayed as “bL.”, The identification seg of the base value one time before is displayed as “b1.”, And the identification seg of the source value two times before is “b2.” And the identification seg of the base value three times before is displayed as “b3.”.
As described above, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment. This embodiment includes the first to fifth embodiments. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (this does not mean that only the one shown in FIG. 1 is provided). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in a second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection for inputting a signal from an operation switch or the like, and the output port 52 is a connection for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, a signal from the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing to the main control board 50, and a signal from the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC having an arithmetic function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and the like. , And payout at the time of winning.

The MPU including the RWM 53, the ROM 54, the main CPU 55, and the registers is mounted on the main control board 50. The RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU, in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is also mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. It should be noted that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
The movement of the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in the medal selector will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the medal selector, as shown in FIG. 1, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (a pair of closing sensors 44a and 44b) are provided (but are not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are configured to be detected by the passage sensor 46 first.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for permitting / non-permitting the insertion of medals. When the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 from the payout opening. I do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 to the hopper 35 is formed. The blocker 45 closes an opening formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector (an opening leading to the medal return opening), and forms a medal passage for guiding the medal to the hopper 35 side. And an actuator for driving the switching member.

  Here, during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when all the reels 31 stop and the winning of the combination) during the game, the insertion of the medal is not permitted. I do. That is, the blocker 45 permits medal insertion at least when a game is not played.

  In the medal selector, a loading sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In the present embodiment, the insertion sensor 44 comprises a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by one of the insertion sensors 44a, the other insertion sensor 44b It is constituted so that it may be detected by. Then, it is determined whether or not a correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on / off.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes, as operation switches operated by the player, a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and The settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the “operation switch (or simply“ switch ”)” switches on / off of an electric signal based on an operation of an operation body by a player (operator) (by receiving an external force). Refers to a device (including an electric circuit and / or an electric component), and does not limit the shape of the operation body operated by the player.

  When the operation switch is off, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to be incident on the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is off). Then, when the (operation body of) the operation switch is operated by a player or the like, light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electric signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and is turned on when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 has a lever (bar) shape (for this reason, it is also referred to as a “start lever (switch) 41”), a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch. The operation body 43 has a push button shape (for this reason, it is also referred to as a “bet button (switch) 40”, a “stop (stop) button (switch) 42”, and a “payment button (switch) 43”). In a fourth embodiment to be described later, the operation body of the stop switch 42 (the part pressed by the player) is referred to as a “stop button 42a”.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operation body of the operation switch and / or around or near the operation body. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, the LED or the like corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light. When the operation of the operation switch is not permitted, the operation of the operation switch is disabled. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission / non-permission state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

  Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are spinning and the operation of the stop switch 42 is in a receivable state, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to indicate that the operation is possible. Shown in When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. Thereafter, the remaining stop switch 42 becomes operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 whose stop is controlled is terminated and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 (fourth described later). After the embodiment is turned off. Therefore, during that time, all the LEDs of the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned on. The LED of the stop switch 42, which is still emitting red light but not yet operated, emits blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, prescribed number) medals are provided.
The present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

  Note that the prescribed number is predetermined in accordance with, for example, when the accessory is not operated / operated. Specifically, the number is set to three when the accessory is not operating, when the SB is activated, when the 1BB is activated, two when the 2BB is activated, and the like. By operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, two medals can be inserted. By operating the switch three times, three medals can be inserted. When the specified number is three, three medals can be inserted at a time by operating the three-bet switch 40b. When the specified number is two, the three-bet switch 40b is operated. Two medals can be inserted at a time. If the three-bet switch 40b is operated in a state in which less than the prescribed number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets becomes three.

The start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reel 31 (all left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31 and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals that have been betted and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that a relay board is actually provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

On the display board 75, a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of acquired players) at the time of winning a winning combination, and is composed of two digits of an upper digit and a lower digit like the credit number display LED 76. .
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled so as to be turned off when there is no medal to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may be displayed as “0”.

The acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays pressing order instruction information (to notify an advantageous pressing order) in a game that notifies the pressing order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves to display the acquired number, error content, and push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the pressing order instruction information may be provided.
During the AT, the notification of the advantageous pressing order is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of the symbol display device and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes a reel 31 (three in this embodiment) for displaying a symbol, a motor 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

  The motor 32 serves as a driving unit for rotating the reel 31, is connected to a rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control unit 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. When stopping the middle reel 31, The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and has an outer peripheral surface to which a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a symbol combination corresponding to a combination) are printed is attached.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected. Further, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses of the (stepping) motor 32 are driven, the number of symbols ahead of the symbol on the reference position are stopped on the active line. Can be identified.

  A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout opening, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. The sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been serviced and received (determined to be normal) from the medal insertion slot 47 are formed to be stored in the hopper 35.
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance. When a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (a movable piece 39a in FIG. 7 described later) moves by the medal. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off by the movement of the predetermined moving member. Based on whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off within a predetermined time range, it is determined whether or not the medal has been correctly paid out.

For example, if the turning on of the pair of payout sensors 37 is not detected even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that medals have not been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the ON signal, it is detected that the medal is clogged.
The details of these operations will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When starting the game, the player inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (reserved bet) or cares and inserts medals through the medal insertion slot 47 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated in a state where a predetermined number of medals of the game are bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control means 65 described later) performs a lottery by the role lottery means 61 and controls the driving of all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control to rotate. When the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the display window at a predetermined speed in the vertical direction.

  Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control unit 65 described later) controls the drive of the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and the lottery result of the role lottery unit 61 (internal lottery). The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result determined by the means).

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning combination is won), payout of medals corresponding to the winning winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are exemplifications, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (decision, selection) of the winning number. Here, the “lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61” is the same as the “internal lottery” in the rules of the law of the wind (rules on the recognition of gaming machines and the verification of model types, hereinafter simply referred to as “rules”). The lottery result by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the “result determined by internal lottery” in the rules. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in an expression in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the role lottery means 61, a winning and replay condition device number and a bonus condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and a winning and replay condition device which can be operated in the game, In addition, the accessory condition apparatus is determined. For this reason, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

  The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for random selection (hardware random number or the like), a random number extracting means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. Winning number determining means for determining a winning number.

  The random number generating means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number that is counted by a counter that counts one in 200 n (nano) seconds and keeps counting in a range from “0” to “65535” as one cycle, and is a random number while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Keep counting.

  The random number extracting means extracts the random number generated by the random number generating means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determining means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means with a lottery table described later.

  The winning flag control means 62 controls ON / OFF of a winning flag corresponding to each winning based on the lottery result by the winning lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for every combination. Then, when one of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, the winning flag of the winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that the winning of the combination includes a case where there is one winning combination (single winning) and a case where there are a plurality of winning combinations (overlapping winning).

The pressing order instruction number selecting means 63 selects a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct answer pressing order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (when a pressing order bell or a pressing order replay is won) ( Decision).
The “push order” of the push order instruction number selected here means an advantageous push order (correct answer order) for the player. For example, at the time of winning the pushing order bell, it indicates the pushing order (correct answering order) in which the higher order bell is won. In addition, at the time of replay overlapping winning, it indicates a pushing order for promoting to a favorable RT or a pushing order for not falling down to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique pressing order instruction number.
Then, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 causes the acquisition number display LED 78 described above to display the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically, “ = * ”(“ * ”= 1, 2,...). The function of displaying the push order instruction information when the condition device having the advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function.
Also, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 starts the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined), the sub control board 50 A command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted to 80.
When receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 displays the correct answer pressing order on the image display device 23 as an image.

  The pressing order number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selecting means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In the normal section, the pressing order instruction number does not have to be selected.

The effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, which is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Here, the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game. The number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is different from the above-described pressing order instruction number, and is selected for each game, and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

  Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives each game and the effect group number, the effect can be output based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, since the correct answer order cannot be determined from the effect group number, the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct answer order based on the effect group number. . On the other hand, during the AT, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, the push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls to start the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving the rotation start command of the reel 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in the present embodiment. .
Further, after the winning number is determined by the winning lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off status of the winning flag in the current game, and determines the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off status of the winning flag. And when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is operated. Drive control is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control unit 65 enables a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (combination for which the winning flag is on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is controlled so as to be stoppable on the line, and the reel 31 is controlled so as not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (combination with the winning flag turned off) on the activated line.

Here, "within the range of the stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is actually stopped or the rotation amount of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)). Within the range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for the predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. Is set to Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of symbols moved from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the stop of the reel 31 is set to four symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB operation.

  On the other hand, for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB operation, the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thereby, for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the stop of the reel 31 is set to one symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated Then, the symbol is controlled so as to stop at a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on a predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that the symbol corresponding to the winning number is stopped on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination of the hand not corresponding to the winning number stops on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, a control is performed so that the symbol combination of the hand not corresponding to the winning number is not stopped on the activated line (kick-off stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won (for example, when a pressing order bell is won), the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. In accordance with the predetermined priority, the control for stopping the drawing of the symbol related to the highest priority combination is performed.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the reel 31 stopped on the activated line when the reel 31 is stopped is a symbol combination corresponding to one of the winning combinations.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped at the activated line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that stops on the activated line before the reel 31 actually stops is determined in advance. It is determined, or the symbol combination stopped on the activated line after the reel 31 has stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) output to the sub-control board 80 and required for an effect to the sub-control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (only when the winning number during AT and a correct answer pressing order is won). , Effect group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on a winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls selection and output of effects (information) during a game and during a game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (the control command transmitting means 71) transmits the effect to the sub-control board 80 in one direction by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) necessary for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or may use both serial communication and parallel communication.

The sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like, like the main control board 50.
The following peripheral devices such as the following effect lamps 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for the effect are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing, as effect data, a program for performing a lottery relating to the effect, various data, and the like.

  The effect lamp 21 is, for example, an LED or the like, and lights in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is provided on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and is a back lamp for illuminating the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols vertically continuous from the display window) from behind, and the reel 31. A fluorescent lamp that illuminates the symbol on the reel 31 from above, a frame lamp that is arranged on the front surface of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won, and the like are included.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like. And game information (such as the number of games played and the number of acquired games during the operation of the accessory and in the advantageous section (AT)).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state until a medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram viewed from the front. FIG. 2 shows the inside of the medal selector so that it can be seen. The medals M indicate M1 to M4 according to their positions. The position of M1 indicates a state in which the medal M is placed in the medal holder 47b of the medal insertion slot 47 (a state before being released). That is, at the position of M1, when viewed from the front, the lowermost point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal holder 47b are in contact.
In FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4 described later), the entire substantially square portion displayed as the input sensors 44a and 44b is the light receiving / emitting range (eye of the sensor) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively (each of them). It is not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b.)

The position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer seen from the front. That is, at the position of M2, the uppermost point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal holder 47b overlap. For example, assuming that the player releases his / her hand from the medal M when the medal M is at the position of M1, the medal M falls from the position of M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, the player is released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
Note that “upstream side” indicates the medal insertion slot 47 side, and “downstream side” indicates the insertion sensor 44b side (hopper 35 side). Speaking of the position of the medal M, M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 from upstream to downstream.

In the example of FIG. 2, when the medal M is located at M2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M is detected by the passage sensor 46.
Further, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (ON) when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. The position of M4 indicates the position at the moment (off) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

  The medal insertion slot 47 is a part for inserting the medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when the player bets or credits the medal M as a game medium. The medal insertion slot 47 includes a medal guard 47a and a medal holder 47b. The medal holder 47b has a substantially curved surface (curvature that is slightly larger than the periphery of the medal M) that extends in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of (up to about ten) stacked medals M can be simultaneously placed. ).

The surface (the surface seen in FIG. 2) of the medal placing portion 47b where the medal M of the medal guard portion 47a comes into contact with the substantially curved surface is formed to intersect substantially vertically.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, a portion where the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a intersect has an opening through which one medal M can flow. When the two medals M are overlapped, the medals M do not fall from the opening, but when the thickness of one medal M is thick, the medals M are formed to flow down from the opening. For this reason, for example, the player places a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placing portion 47b, and presses the medals M in the direction of the medal guard portion 47a while increasing the pressing force. By weakening, the medals M placed on the medal holder 47b can be dropped one by one into the medal selector from the opening.

  When a medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M flows down a passage in the medal selector. In the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side. Further, the blocker 45 described above is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a (in FIG. 2, below the input sensor 44a).

  When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining whether or not there is a medal clogging or goto action, and detects the medal M for a predetermined time (predetermined) from when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, When the medal M is no longer detected after the elapse of a predetermined time, it is determined that the medal M is normal. On the other hand, if the medal M continues to be detected after the passage of a predetermined time after the passage sensor 46 detects the medal, it is determined that a medal staying error has occurred. If the medal M is not detected before the predetermined time elapses after the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, it is determined that the medal M is illegally passed.

  When the medal M flows down in the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side in the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the ON state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is ON), the blocker 45 forms a medal flow path so that the medals M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has a role of sending the medal M that has moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b without sending it out of the medal path.

  On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is off (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is off), the blocker 45 moves in FIG. As a result, an opening (a pit) is formed in the medal passage. Thus, when the blocker 45 is in the off state, the medal M falls from this opening just before reaching the M3 and is sent out of the medal path (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M dropped from this opening is returned to a medal return opening (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the specified number of the game has already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more medals can be bet and credits cannot be made, and the blocker 45 is controlled to the off state. Thus, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in that state, the medal M falls from the opening and returns to the medal return port.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, since the opening is closed by the blocker 45, the medals M flowing down in the medal passage pass over the blocker 45, and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b To the side.

  In the present embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of the ON / OFF state of the blocker 45, the medal M can be detected by the passage sensor 46. When the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and When the blocker 45 is in the off state, it is sufficient that the medal M can be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 may be located between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

  Further, the passage sensor 46 only needs to be located on the upstream side of the blocker 45, and is arranged at a position where the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is in the off state. Just do it. Further, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M can be detected when the medal M is located at the position M2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal M is further downstream than the position of the medal M2. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when moving to.

  The insertion sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting a medal M that has passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance from each other. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side can detect the medal M (turned from off to on). When the medal M further flows, the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns from off to on). By determining the on / off timing of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, it is no longer detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, the position of the medal M at the position of M2, that is, from the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when the medal selector is viewed from the front, to the position of the medal M, that is, the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. (The moving trajectory is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is set as time T2. Note that the value is obtained when the user releases his / her hand (at the initial speed “0”) from the medal M when the medal M is located at M1 and releases the hand downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is located at M2 exceeds “0”.

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal passage is bent from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with the impact member, the speed of the medal M is reduced, and the medal M is directed to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M3 (the moment when the insertion sensor 44a detects) to the moment when the medal M is located at the M4 (the moment when the detection is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set as the time T3. .

<First Embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows a voltage level when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 3, a voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is defined as a supply level V0. In the state of the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 illustrates an example in which the power supply is cut off at the time S11 (the power supply cutoff event occurs). In the present embodiment, when the power interruption occurs, the voltage drops to the power interruption detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from the occurrence of the power interruption (time S11; supply level V0) to the detection of the power interruption (time S12; power interruption detection level V1) is at least 20 interruptions (1 interruption time 2.235 ms × 20). (Interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
On the main control board 50, a voltage monitoring device (not shown) (power cutoff detection circuit) is provided. When the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power-off detection level V1, which is a predetermined value, a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and by detecting whether or not the signal has been input, the power supply is detected. Disconnection is detected.

When the voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level V1 and falls below the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
The example of FIG. 3 illustrates an example in which the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55 at time S13, and thereafter drops to Low. The main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes lower than the drive voltage limit V2. Therefore, when the power-off occurs at the time S11, the main-power control board 50 can terminate the power-off process at least by the time S13. Is set to

The detection of the power-off is performed in the interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms. However, when the power-off is detected for two consecutive interrupts, the power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is a timing at which it is determined that the voltage is equal to or lower than the power-off detection level V1 in the interrupt processing for two consecutive times, and that power-off has been detected. Then, the power interruption process is executed in the next interruption process.
In the interruption processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the power-off is detected. When the power-off is detected, the process shifts to the power-off process (without shifting to the normal interrupt process). In the power-off processing, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The blocker 45 is turned off by the process of turning off the output port 52. Further, processing for storing a stack pointer, setting processing for a power-off processing completed flag (a flag for determining whether or not the normal power-off processing has been performed), processing for executing a checksum of the RWM 53, processing for inhibiting writing to the RWM 53, and the like are performed. After the sequential execution, a reset wait state (loop processing state) is set. This reset waiting state is a state in which no processing is performed by design.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, in the interrupt process following the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power shutdown is detected, the power shutdown process is executed, and the blocker 45 is turned off.
The power-off processing is not limited to being executed in the interrupt processing subsequent to the interrupt processing in which the power-off is detected, and the power-off processing may be executed in the interrupt processing in which the power-off is detected. In this case, “T1 = S12−S11”.

  On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medal is inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player has released his / her hand from the medal M while the medal M is at the position of M1. In this case, the medal M falls at the initial speed “0”. Thereby, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 at which the power is cut off and the time at which the medal M reaches the position of M2 are matched.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4 is T2. Later, it is assumed that the medal M is located at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship of “T2> T1”.

  Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, the power-off process is executed before the medal M reaches the position M4, and the insertion sensor 44b does not detect the medal M. Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return opening (lower plate) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, swallowing occurs for the medal M, but after the power is turned off (after time S11), the process of adding “1” to the medal M (adding “1” to bet or credit) is executed. Not done. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that betting or credit processing will be executed after a power-off.

For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power-off processing), when the medal M is located immediately before M4 in FIG. Is passed through the position of M3), the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Further, in the case where the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power-off processing), the medal M is located upstream of the position of M3 in FIG. At that time, the power of the medal M is turned off without being detected by either the insertion sensor 44a or the insertion sensor 44b.

In FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when the medal M is located at M3 is defined as time T2 '.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship of “T2 ′> T1”.
In the case where the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2 in the case of designing in the above relationship, when the medal M reaches the position M3, the blocker 45 is turned off by executing the power-off process. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a, and is sent to the medal return port.

Here, a difference between the related art and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, if a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, when the power failure is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, after the power-off, the medal “1” addition processing (bet processing or credit processing) has been executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after the power failure occurs. This is because, after a power-off, all processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped immediately.
Therefore, with the configuration as in the first embodiment (A), even if the player inserts the medal M from the medal insertion slot 47 and the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after the insertion), Since the processing of adding the “1” medal is not executed, the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<First Embodiment (B)>
In the first embodiment (B), the relationship between the closing sensors 44a and 44b and the power-off is determined.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing a process from when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the direction of the arrow indicates the direction in which the medal M moves (flows down).
FIG. 4A shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the input sensor 44a is at the moment when it is turned on from off, and the input sensor 44b is kept off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left in FIG. 4 and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4B, the insertion sensor 44a remains in the state of detecting the medal M, and the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M. Become like Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is at the moment when the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
In FIG. 4, even when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines, but the medal M and the insertion sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged on the near side or the back side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

When the medal M further advances and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4C, the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the input sensor 44a in this case is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 mm (so-called 25 pie (φ)) in the general specification and 30 mm (so-called 30 pie (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b so that the state shown in FIG. Here, as described later, it is determined whether or not the state in FIG. 4C, that is, the time during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are on (detecting the medal M) is within a predetermined range. Determines whether or not a medal insertion error is determined. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b also differs depending on how to set the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are on.

  When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 4C, as shown in FIG. 4D, the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M. In this case, the moment when the input sensor 44a is turned off from on, the input sensor 44b remains on. When the medal M further advances, the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off and the input sensor 44b is at the moment when the input sensor 44b is turned off from on. Note that the position of the medal M in FIG. 4E corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a time chart showing ON / OFF of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (the input sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing in FIG.
Next, let S22 be the time (FIG. 4B) at the moment when the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns from OFF to ON). Furthermore, the time (FIG. 4D) at the moment when the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M (turns from on to off) is set to S23. Further, the time (FIG. 4E) at the moment when the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M (turns from ON to OFF) is defined as S24.

  Here, if the time Ta (from time S21 to S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a is detecting the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 1) The main control board 50 determines that a normal medal M has passed, and if it is out of this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

  Also, the time Tb (from time S22 to S23) during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are detecting the medal M is within a range of 4.47 ms (two interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts). If this is the case (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal has passed the normal medal M, and if it is out of this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (from time S22 to S24) during which the insertion sensor 44b is detecting the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3) The main control board 50 determines that the medal passes the normal medal M, and if it is out of this range, it is determined that a medal passing error has occurred.
If all of the above conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, it is determined that the passing of the medal M is normal, and if at least one condition is not satisfied, a medal passing error is determined.

As shown in FIG. 5, when both of the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the input monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Here, the insertion monitoring counter becomes “+1” when the above-described passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, and when the medal normally passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b (both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). The counter is incremented by "-1" when the state changes from "on" to "off" (at time S24). That is, in a normal state, “1” and “0” are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes “−1” and the main control board 50 determines that the medal has passed. I do.

When the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = “+ 1”) and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. When the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value equal to or greater than “2”, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. For example, when the normal value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to “0” to “2”, when the insertion monitoring counter becomes “3” or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. Can be
Note that the input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

  In FIG. 5, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by “1”, and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 Execute processing (bet processing or credit processing). For example, if the bet number is less than the specified number at that time, "1" addition processing of the bet number is executed. Specifically, when the prescribed number in the game is “3” and the bet number at that time is “0”, the bet number is increased from “0” by adding “1” to the bet number. Update to "1".

Further, at that time, if the bet amount has already reached the specified number and the credit amount has not reached the maximum number of “50”, the credit amount “1” addition process is executed. For example, if the credit amount at that time is “10”, the credit amount is updated to “11”.
When the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number “50”, the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. Thus, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in this case, even if the medal M is inserted, it is not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In FIG. 5, in addition to ON / OFF of the input sensors 44a and 44b, the timing at the time of occurrence of power interruption and the timing of power interruption detection are displayed. FIG. 5 shows Example 1 and Example 2, both of which illustrate an example in which the power supply is cut off at the timing when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (time S21).
Then, in Example 1, the power interruption is detected after a lapse of time T1 from the time S21 when the power interruption occurs. Here, in Example 1, “T1> T3” is set. Therefore, when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is turned off, the power-off processing is started after the “1” addition processing of the medal M has already been executed.

Here, the time T3 from the time S21 to S24 can be represented by “Ta + Tc−Tb”. Therefore, the minimum time of the time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts, and is “8.94 ms”.
Further, the maximum time of the time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts, and is “252.555 ms”.
Then, in Example 1, it is set so that the power-off process is always executed after the time S24 has elapsed. For this reason, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power interruption (time S21) to the execution of power interruption processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

  With the above setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power-off process is executed after the process of adding “1” of the medal M is performed. , The medal M is normally betted or credited. Therefore, swallowing of the medal M can be prevented.

In addition, the example 2 is an example in which, contrary to the example 1, the power-off process is executed before the process of adding “1” to the medal M is executed. That is, in Example 2, the setting is made so as to satisfy the relationship of “T1 <T3”.
The time T3 from the time S21 to the time S24 corresponds to four interrupts in the minimum time as described above. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of “T1 <T3”, it is necessary to execute the power-off processing within three interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off process to be executed within three interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than four interrupts. For example, the minimum time of the time Tc may be set to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of the power interruption (time S21) to the power interruption processing is set to about 10 interrupts, the power interruption processing is executed before the time S24 when the power interruption occurs at the time S21. It becomes possible.

  When the power-off process is performed, the “1” addition (bet or credit) process of the medal M is not performed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the time S21 (when the power is turned off), the process of adding “1” to the medal M1 is not performed. As a result, there is a demerit that the medal M is swallowed. However, as described in the first embodiment (A), after the power is cut off, the “1” addition processing of the medal M is not executed. The power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First Embodiment (C)>
In the first embodiment (C), the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and the power-off is determined.
When adding medals to be paid out to credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the storage area of the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit amount display LED 76 is updated so as to be a number corresponding to the credit amount stored in the storage area.

  Then, when paying out medals after the number of credits reaches the upper limit value “50”, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out medals from the hopper 35 (discharge from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect on / off each time one medal is paid out. If the detection result of on / off by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and if the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M is determined. Is not paid out correctly, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

  FIG. 6 is a plan view for explaining the operation when the medal M is paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disk (substantially disk-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom portion of the hopper 35, and the hopper disk is rotated by driving a hopper motor 36. In this hopper disk, a plurality of openings capable of holding the medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disk. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk rotates and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are discharged one by one. The medals M are discharged, and new medals M in the hopper 35 enter the vacant opening.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 is the one immediately after being discharged from the opening of the hopper disk. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are components constituting a medal payout device. The fixed axis 38a is an axis that does not move when the medal M is paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. In a no-load state, the movable shaft 38b is arranged at a position indicated by a solid line in the drawing, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to a spring 39b in FIG. 7 described later). 38a. The medal M (M1) immediately after being discharged from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In a state where the medal M is arranged at a position (M1) shown by a solid line in FIG. Narrower than diameter. Therefore, at this time, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

  A pushing force in the direction F1 in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M discharged from the opening of the hopper disk. Then, when a pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M can move in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the drawing. Note that the fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the direction F2 in the figure while maintaining the state of being in contact with the medal M. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves to a position where the medal M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is larger than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

  Thereby, the medal M passes through the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and is discharged in the F1 direction (medal payout opening side) in the drawing. The medal M at this time is indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is discharged, the force for pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is returned to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 again by the force of the spring.

  FIG. 7 is a plan view illustrating the on (detection) / off (non-detection) state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medal M is paid out as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows that the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) every time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows a state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is located at a position (initial position) indicated by a solid line in FIG. The movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatable about a central axis in the drawing, and is urged clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in the figure, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is urged toward the fixed shaft 38a in the figure.
In a state where the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in FIG. 7 by the spring 39b and no force other than the tension force of the spring 39b is applied to the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a is fixed to a predetermined stopper (not shown). 7), it stops at the position shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7A, on the left side of the movable piece 39a, a payout sensor 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the payout sensors 37a and 37b. When the movable piece 39a is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7A, the leading end thereof is detected by the payout sensor 37a. ing.
In FIG. 7, each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b shows the housing of the sensor, and illustration of the light emitting / receiving unit (the eyes of the sensor) is omitted. This point is different from the closing sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS. 2 and 4 in which only the light receiving / emitting unit (the eyes of the sensor) is illustrated.

Here, the payout sensor 37a is in an on state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is detected, and is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7B) when the movable piece 39a is no longer detected. It is set to be.
Similarly, the payout sensor 37b is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and is turned on (for example, FIG. 7C) when the movable piece 39a is detected. Is set to
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in an on state, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in an off state.

  As described with reference to FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the direction F1 in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts moving in the direction F2 in FIG. 7A, the movable piece 39a starts to rotate counterclockwise against the urging force of the spring 39b. When the movable piece 39a moves to the position of FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out of the inside of the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the payout sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, so that it is turned off. Even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7B, the payout sensor 37a is off, and the payout sensor 37b is off.

  In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the direction F2 and reaches a position indicated by a two-dot chain line (a position where the medal M can pass through a gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b) in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. Thereby, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7C, the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state.

  In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position of M2, there is no force for urging the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in FIG. 6, so that the movable shaft 38b is moved to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. Return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. Thereby, in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7D shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7D, the payout sensor 37a is in an off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in an off state.

  When the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a. This returns to the state of FIG. 7A (initial state). In the state of FIG. 7A, as described above, the payout sensor 37a is on, and the payout sensor 37b is off. When returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing ON / OFF of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the payout process of medals has been started and the hopper motor drive signal is on.
In FIG. 8, before the time S31, the state is as shown in FIG. When the time reaches S31, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is turned off). Next, at time S32, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

  The payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state until time S33. At the time S33, the payout sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is Te. Then, when the time reaches S34, the state returns to the state (initial position) in FIG. 7A, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the time of the on / off state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that a medal payout error has occurred if the payout sensors 37a and 37b are not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to be less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, if the payout sensor 37b is turned off by the twelfth interrupt after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, it is determined to be normal. However, if the payout sensor 37b is on by the twelfth interrupt. If not, a medal payout error is assumed.

  The time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on is set to be equal to or longer than 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) and shorter than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored, and when the time Te is not within the above-mentioned predetermined time range, The main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

  Further, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) And less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored. When the time is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Also, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIGS. 3 and 5, the time from the occurrence of power interruption to the power interruption processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off at the timing of time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example in which the power interruption is detected by 20 interrupts has been described. However, in the example of FIG. At the time of T1), a setting is made so as to detect power-off and execute power-off processing.

  Here, the maximum time (normal operation) of the time “Td + Tf” is “12 + 27 = 39” interrupts. Therefore, the time T1 from power-off to execution of power-off processing is set to, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4 ms). Set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff processing can be started after the payout processing of one medal has been normally completed. That is, “(Td + Tf) <T1” can be set.

Conventionally, power interruption (power failure etc.) has occurred during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the timing of the medal payout process and the power-off, it is determined that the medal has been paid out even though the medal has not been paid out, and there is a possibility that the player may lose money.
On the other hand, in the first embodiment (C), medals can be correctly paid out even if a power failure occurs during the payout processing of medals.

  In particular, when the medal payout process is started, that is, even when the power is cut off at the timing of time S31 in FIG. 8, the power cutoff is detected after one medal payout process is completed, and the process proceeds to the power cutoff process. Therefore, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is in the off state or when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state, the power-off process is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the power-off process from being performed during the medal payout process, and the medal payout process from being stopped before the (one) medal payout process ends normally.

  If the time T1 is set longer than necessary, the payout process of the next medal may be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is performed at least before the next medal payout process is performed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a changes from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, it is set so that “T1 <T4”.

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to a trace of a gate formed on a substrate case of a main control substrate 50.
In the related art, the shape, size, position, and the like of the gate mark of the substrate case are determined by a mold designer at the time of manufacturing the mold, solely for the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the gate trace has an uneven surface, even if a hole is made to aim at the gate trace, for example, there is a case where it cannot be visually recognized (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is disposed immediately below the gate trace, a hole is made in the gate trace, a wire is passed through the hole, and the like, and the main CPU 55 is accessed. Done). In particular, when the gate mark is formed to be thinner than other portions, holes are more easily formed than in other portions.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, a goto action is prevented from being performed using the gate trace of the substrate case.

FIG. 9 is an exploded external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58).
The board case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, and both are molded products (injection) made of a transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is accommodated inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed from outside the board case 56.

On the main control board 50, electronic components such as the above-described main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also referred to as "ratio monitor" or "ratio display"), and set value display LED 73 are provided. It is installed. Although many electronic components such as the above-described RWM 53 and ROM 54 are mounted on the main control board 50, they are not shown in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 9, on the main control board 50, bet switches 40a and 40b, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and LEDs for confirming failure of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are mounted. Have been. The failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is off when the start switch 41 is off, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects on). ) Is an LED that is turned on (lit).

  It should be noted that the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LED of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects on), and when the operation switch is off. You may comprise so that it may light.

Further, two failure confirmation LEDs for the bet switches 40a and 40b are provided for the bet switches 40a and 40b, and are turned off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and the bet switch 40 is operated. When the electric signal at that time is received, the LED is turned on.
Furthermore, a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for the passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are provided for each sensor, and are turned off when no medal is detected, and turned on when a medal is detected. LED.
Then, the administrator operates, for example, the start switch 41 to check whether the LED for checking the failure of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is turned on or off, thereby determining whether the start switch 41 has a failure (energization). Can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches and sensors.

  When the front door is opened during normal operation (the setting is not being changed and the setting is not being checked), the failure checking LED may be turned on / off by operating the start switch 41 or the like. . Alternatively, the failure confirmation may be performed by opening the front door and performing a predetermined operation after a door open error occurs. Furthermore, the light may be turned on / off by operating the start switch 41 or the like at all times (even while the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked).

The model number of the board is displayed (printed or the like) on the main control board 50. Although not shown in FIG. 9, a model number and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surface of the RWM 53 and the ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed at four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at four inner corners on the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw hole 50a and the boss 58c overlap, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case 58 by being screwed to the boss 58c through a screw from the screw hole 50a. can do.

  When the upper cover 57 is overlaid on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed into a fitting shape (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown). Further, caulking portions 57a are provided on both left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the drawing. Similarly, caulking portions 58a are provided on the left and right rows of the lower cover 58 in the drawing. In FIG. 9, illustrations of specific shapes and detailed shapes of the caulked portions 57 a and 58 b are omitted.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and caulking is performed using the caulking portions 57a and 58a, thereafter, at least a part of the caulking portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed (unless plastic deformation is performed). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, security of the main control board 50 can be secured.

As shown in FIG. 9, two gate marks 57b are provided on the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. In the board case 56 (in a state where the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted), the side where the main control board 50 is housed is referred to as “inside”, and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as “outside”. .
In FIG. 9, the gate trace 57b is provided at two places, but is not limited thereto, and may be provided at any place.

Here, the “gate” is a gate at the time of pouring resin (hot water) into a mold at the time of resin molding, and a gate mark is a mark remaining at a boundary between a gate and a molded product after resin molding. is there.
When the board case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is low cost to use a mold that is vertically divided in FIG. When a multi-cavity mold is used, it is preferable to use a pin gate. From the viewpoint of fluidity of resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide a gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed not on the side surface but in the upper surface in FIG.

Further, in consideration of cutting of the protrusion of the gate mark at the time of molding, the gate mark is preferably provided outside.
From the above, the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided outside the upper surface.
For the same reason as above, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided outside the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, the gate traces 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided at two places like the gate traces 57b of the upper cover 57, but may be provided at one place or at three or more places. Is also good.

  In addition, when resin (hot water) flows from the gate into the mold, if the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold is not uniform and a cooling time difference occurs, the molded product may be warped and deformed. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold becomes uniform. Further, when the gates are provided at a plurality of locations, it is preferable that the distance from the end of the molded article to the gates and the distance between the gates are made as equal as possible.

  10A is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 of the board case 56 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58, and the main control board 50. FIG. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). ) Is a plan view as viewed from above. Further, the main control board 50 is seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows an example 1 of a cross-sectional view of AA in FIG. (A), and (c) shows an example 2 of a cross-sectional view of AA in FIG. Is shown. In these cross-sectional views, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of the visibility of the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, in a state where the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, the two gate traces 57b extend vertically (on the main control board 50 side) (directly below) the upper cover 57 from the two gate traces 57b. The model number display, the management information display LED 74, the set value display LED 73, and the main CPU 55 (socket) are set so as not to be located. Note that, as described above, the RWM 53, the ROM 54, and the LED for failure confirmation are also mounted on the main control board 50, but it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not positioned directly above them.

The gate traces 57 are arranged as described above for the following reasons.
Even after the slot machine 10 is installed in the market, it is necessary for the main control board 50 to visually check whether any unauthorized modification or the like has been performed. In particular, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and the ROM 54; the same applies hereinafter) and whether or not the main CPU 55 has been modified by the goto action. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from outside the board case 56. is there.
The board case 56 in which the main control board 50 is housed is mounted inside the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, on the inside of the back. This is for mounting at a position where the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are easy to see.

  For this reason, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 looks at the board case 56 (main control board 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate trace 57b, the visibility may be hindered by the gate trace 57. In particular, information displayed (printed or the like) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like can be visually observed without obstructing visibility.

  Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from a transparent resin, the visibility is not completely impaired even immediately below the gate trace 57b. However, as shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 10, the cross section of the gate mark 57b becomes an uneven surface, so that the visibility immediately below the gate mark 57b is reduced (it is worse than a plane). It is true. In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10B, since the upper end surface of the projection 57d is a cut surface, whitening may occur due to stress at the time of cutting the resin. Therefore, also in this case, the visibility immediately below the gate mark 57b is hindered.

In addition, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a transparent surface without any irregularities except for the gate traces 57b, even if a hole is made by a goto action, the upper surface can be easily noticed visually.
On the other hand, the gate trace 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if a hole is formed in the gate hole 57b and then the hole is sealed with, for example, a resin material or the like, it may not be easy to visually determine whether or not the hole has been formed in the gate mark 57b. Therefore, there is a possibility that a goto action using the gate trace 57b is performed.

  On the other hand, when a hole is made in the gate trace 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are positioned in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate trace 57b, the goto action becomes easy. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are not arranged in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate trace 57b, it is difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, and it is possible to make the goto action difficult.

  The model number displayed (printed or the like) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking whether there is any fraud. Therefore, the model number is displayed to make it easy to confirm (read) the model number. The gate trace 57b was not arranged directly above the region. Further, when a gate mark 57b is present immediately above the model number indication, a hole is formed in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the substrate case 56, and to prevent the model number indication from being tampered with. The gate trace 57b is not arranged directly above the model number display.

  Further, with respect to the set value display LED 73, it is necessary to see the displayed numerical value at the time of setting change or setting confirmation. Also, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to look at the displayed numerical value in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the gate trace 57b is not arranged directly above these LEDs. Further, in the same manner as described above, a hole is formed in the gate trace 57b by using the gate trace 57b, and the LEDs in the substrate case 56 are accessed from the hole. The gate mark 57b is not arranged on the top.

  Also, for the above-described failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates the operation switch to confirm whether the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch is turned on or not. For this reason, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above the failure confirmation LED. Similar to the above, the failure confirmation LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate trace 57b, thereby making it difficult to perform the goto action.

In each of the sectional views of Example 1 shown in FIG. 10B and Example 2 shown in FIG. 10C, the outer shape of the gate trace 57b is the same. Then, in Example 1 of (b), the inside of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b remains a flat surface. On the other hand, in Example 2 of (c), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed in a projection shape (thickness).
The outside of the gate trace 57b has a projection 57d at the center thereof, and has a recess 57c formed so as to sink into a cylindrical shape at the outer periphery thereof. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected at the time of molding. When the molded product is separated from the mold, this boundary is cut by a cutter. Therefore, the upper end surface of the projection 57d is a cut surface by the cutter. Cutting of the boundary between the gate and the molded product includes a method of automatically cutting at the time of injection by a molding machine and a method of cutting in a later step.

  Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, it is costly to completely cut the cut surface into a smooth surface, in other words, to make the height of the projection 57d almost “0”. High and difficult. Therefore, the recess 57c is formed so that the protrusion 57d does not protrude above the outer surface of the upper surface of the upper cover 57 even if the protrusion 57d has a certain height. Thus, when the assembling operator touches the upper cover 57, for example, it is possible to prevent the projection 57d from being injured.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the recess 57c is provided in the gate trace 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced by that amount. As described above, if there is a thin part even in a part, there is a possibility that a gotting action of making a hole in the recess 57 c and accessing the inside of the substrate case 56 may be facilitated.
In view of this, in Example 2 of FIG. 10C, a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inside) of the upper surface where the gate trace 57b is provided to prevent the thickness of only the recess 57c from being reduced. I have. If the projection 57e is not provided and a portion where the wall thickness is reduced is not provided, it is possible to make it difficult to make a hole in the recess 57c.

  Further, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to countermeasures against fraud by preventing a part of the thickness of the gate trace 57b from becoming thin, but also functions as a dimple (pool) during molding. In FIG. 10 (b), when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate of the mold (the position corresponding to the projection 57d) and the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) There is a possibility that the flow may change rapidly and the flow may not be stable. Therefore, by providing a dimple (water pool) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, the flow of the resin (hot water) is prevented from changing suddenly. (Hot water) can flow stably. The protruding portion 57e may have various shapes such as a quadrangular cross-section, a triangular cross-section, a trapezoidal cross-section (in the case of FIG. 10C), a dome cross-section, and the like. Any shape may be used as long as the shape can prevent the occurrence.

  Regarding the visibility of the gate trace 57b in the vertical direction (directly below), it is better that the lower side of the gate trace 57 is smoother than the uneven shape. Therefore, regarding the visibility just below the gate trace 57b, the shape of FIG. 10B is superior to the shape of FIG. 10C. In addition, the shape of FIG. 10B simplifies the shape of the mold because it is not necessary to form a portion corresponding to the protrusion 57e in the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. 10C. Lower costs).

Also, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 is provided on the outside (the lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, the protrusion 57d and the recess 57c shown in FIG. 10B are formed on the outside. As described above, it is more convenient to provide the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c on the outside of the molded product in terms of the molding process.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pin position of the main CPU 55 and the like of the main control board 50 is set so as not to be located in the vertical direction of the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58. This is because a hole is formed in the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 so that the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like cannot be accessed.
When the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 has the shape shown in FIG. 10C, the protrusion 57e of FIG. 10C faces the pin side of the main control board 50. Of course, the pins projecting from the lower surface of the control board 50 and the projections 57e are formed so as not to interfere (contact) with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted, the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 are vertically overlapped. It is preferable to dispose (shift) them so that they do not match. In particular, when the gate traces 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10B are used, the thickness of a part of the gate traces 57b and 58b (the concave portion 57c) is reduced, but the portion where the thickness is reduced is the upper cover. By arranging the lower cover 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions that do not overlap each other, it is possible to prevent portions that are easily targeted from overlapping.
When the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate trace of the other cover can be determined only by looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 are prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). Later, when communication returns, or when communication fails due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as the pressing order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub-control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the effect in accordance with the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are disconnected and communication becomes impossible. The causes include poor contact and radio waves. When the sub-control board 80 no longer receives a command from the main control board 50, the effect stops in the current state. Neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 determines whether there is a disconnection in the communication between them. For this reason, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80, the main control board 50 proceeds with the game (by operating the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42). Etc.), the process of transmitting the command to the sub-control board 80 is continued. On the other hand, when the sub control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, the effect state at that time is maintained.
Even when the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are disconnected, for example, during an AT, the main control board 50 causes the acquired number display LED 78 to display the pressing order by operating the instruction function. Display instruction information. Thereby, even when the sub-control board 80 is not functioning normally, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct answering order by looking at the pushing order instruction information.
Further, since the player can compare the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 with the effect contents (correct pressing order) displayed on the image display device 23, the information of both is inconsistent. If it is, it can be known that a problem has occurred in the image display by the sub-control board 80.

For example, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game, the command transmitted from the main control board 50 can be received by the sub control board 80. Sometimes, the effect cannot be suddenly switched to the "N + 1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 determines that the “N + 1” game item has been started when the command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (command notifying the start of the game) has not been received. This is because it cannot be determined. For this reason, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is broken and then returned, there is a possibility that the player may be misunderstood depending on the contents of the effect.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is broken and then returned, when the player returns as little as possible, the effect is made uncomfortable while minimizing the misunderstanding of the player. Output an effect that does not exist.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 in the third embodiment (referred to as “main operation” in FIG. 11) and the effect display by the sub-control board 80 (referred to as “sub-display” in FIG. 11). ), And shows five examples including pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 all show an example in which communication is disabled during the "N" game (disconnection occurs) and communication is restored during the "N + 1" game.
In the main operation of FIG. 11, “bet” means that the bet switch 40 has been operated and a prescribed number of valid bets has been placed. “Start” means that the game has started by operating the start switch 41 after the specified number has been bet. Furthermore, for example, “right stop” means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 stops).

Further, in the sub-display, the “push order effect” means an effect in which the correct answer push order is image-displayed in a game that has been won for the push order bell or the push order replay, for example. Specifically, for example, “right-left-center display” means an effect that informs that the correct answer pressing order is “right-left-center”. Note that, for example, “middle left display” is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, and that the stop switch operated second is the left stop switch 42 operated thirdly. Means production to inform.
Furthermore, for example, the “right stop effect” refers to an effect that the right stop switch 42 was operated (the right reel 31 stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 was operated was received. means.

In the pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated at the “N” game item, as described above, the main control board 50 performs a lottery of a winning combination. In this game, “right and left middle” is an example in which the pushing order bell which is the correct answer pushing order is won. In this case, the main control board 50 transmits a pressing order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct pressing order “right and left middle” to the sub control board 80 during the AT. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs to the image display device 23 a pressing order effect for displaying the right-to-left middle correct pressing order.
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the correct answer pressing order “middle right and left” on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop after seeing the correct answer pressing order (right stop). As a result, the right reel 31 stops, and a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped), and displays the middle right and left display and the middle left display (other middle). Are displayed as "-middle left", "middle left", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection has occurred after the right reel 31 has stopped, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 has been disabled (sub disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication is disabled during the game.

  Even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disabled (even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning), the main control board 50 can proceed with the game. The example of the pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are operated (the left and middle reels 31 are stopped) after the occurrence of the disconnection in the “N” game eyes (left middle stop). ).

  Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the “N + 1” game is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the “N + 1” game item, as in the “N” game item, an example is shown in which “right and left middle” has won the push order bell (or push order replay), which is the correct answer push order. In the "N + 1" game, as in the "N" game, an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle right and left pushing order is shown. The result is not limited to this, and may be any role lottery result.

  In addition, when the push order bell (or the push order replay) having the correct answer push order is won in the “N + 1” game, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, even if the correct push order is not displayed on the image display device 23, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct push order based on the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Become.

In the “N + 1” game, the player operates the right stop switch 42 first. Thereafter, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
Thus, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 updates the continuation of the effect already displayed, that is, the effect of the “N” game.

  Therefore, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the “N + 1” game is actually operated, but the sub-control board 80 sets the second stop switch 42 (left) of the “N” game. Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct answer pressing order in the “N” game is left, in this example, it is operated in the correct answer pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (push order correct answer effect) and outputs an effect of the last middle display.

Then, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated in the “N + 1” game, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the “N” game, that is, a middle stop effect.
In the case of the “N + 1” game, when the player wins the role having the correct answer pressing order, and the correct answer pressing order is other than right and left, the effect is output as described above in the situation of the pattern 1. Is done. That is, in the “N + 1” game, when the pressing order operated by the player is right and left, even if the pressing order corresponds to the incorrect pressing order, a pressing order failure such as a pattern 2 described later occurs. The effect is not output.

  Furthermore, in the case of the "N + 1" game, if the player has won a role that does not have the correct answer pressing order, or even if the player has not won the role, if the pressing order operated by the player is the middle right and left, The same effect as is output. That is, even if the “N + 1” game item does not have the correct push order, the sub-control board 80 determines that the left stop switch 42 is operated after the communication is restored (in the example of the pattern 1). When a command is received, a left stop effect (push-order correct answer effect) is output, and a middle display is output.

  Next, when a bet for the “N + 2” game item is made and the “N + 2” game item is started by operating the start switch 41, the main control board 50 A command corresponding to the start of the "N + 2" game is transmitted. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect at the start of the “N + 2” game eye. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, the command of the effect group number and the pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving these commands, the sub-control board 80 performs a pressing order effect and displays the correct pressing order, as in the start of the “N” game.

As described above, in the pattern 1, until the third stop of the “N + 1” game eye, the sub-control board 80 performs the “N” game eye based on the command received from the main control board 50 (the “N + 1” game eye). Is continued to be output, and when the “N + 2” game item is started, the effect is updated to the “N + 2” game item.
Further, at the end of the game, the main control board 50 transmits a command for the acquired number to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 sometimes displays an image of the acquired number during the AT. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command of the acquired number at the end of the “N” game, that is, during the disconnection. "The acquired number at the end of the game item remains displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and the command of the acquired number at the end of the “N + 1” game is received, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so as to be the acquired number at the end of the “N + 1” game. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. The timing of the disconnection is the same as that of the pattern 1, but the timing at which the communication is restored is different from that of the pattern 2. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the “N + 1” game.
In the pattern 2, the main operation and the sub display in the “N” game are the same as those in the pattern 1, and the description is omitted.
Next, in the "N + 1" game, the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of right and left, and it is assumed that communication is restored after the second left stop.

  Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect and the middle left display of the “N” game. In this state, communication is restored, and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) during the “N + 1” game, the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the middle stop command while the middle left display is being performed, it determines that the order is incorrect and the order in which the keys are pushed is output. In the third embodiment, after outputting the push order failure effect, the subsequent push order effect is not output.

In addition, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle left and right pushing order in the “N + 1” game, the communication is restored after the middle left stop, and then the right stop command is issued due to the right stop command. Also when transmitted to the substrate 80, a push order failure effect is output in the same manner as described above. Since the sub control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect and the middle left display, if the right stop command is received at this time, the same stop command is received twice in one game. . Even in such a case, the processing is performed as a pressing order failure without performing error notification or the like, and the effect is output.
Then, when the “N + 2” game item is started in the same manner as in the pattern 1, a command at the start of the “N + 2” game item is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 starts the effect of the “N + 2” game eyes.

In pattern 3, the main operation and the sub display of the “N” game are the same as in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which the communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop during the “N + 1” game. Therefore, in the “N + 1” game, after the communication is restored, a left stop command, which is the third stop, is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 has output the "middle left display" of the "N" game, when receiving the left stop command in this state, the sub control board 80 determines that the correct answer is the pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (push order correct answer effect), and then outputs a middle display.

  However, on the main control board 50 side, the game for the “N + 1” th game ends with the third left stop. Next, the process proceeds to the “N + 2” game, and when the command at the start of the “N + 2” game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command, and the “N + 2” game Switch to the production at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and the middle display that have been output until then are canceled. Also, even if a command at the start of the “N + 2” game eye is received during the output of the middle display, an error notification or the like is not performed, and an effect at the start of the “N + 2” game eye is output according to the received command. .

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games in AT in the sub display. In the pattern 4, the main operation, the disconnection timing, and the communication return timing are the same as those in the pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command of the remaining number of games of the AT to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game or game. When receiving the command of the remaining number of games of the AT from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 updates the display of the remaining number of games of the AT. During the AT, the display of the remaining number of games is not performed alone, but is output together with the pressing order effect of the pattern 3.

In pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of a game), the main control board 50 transmits a command of the remaining number of games in the AT to the sub control board 80. Here, it is assumed that the remaining number of games in the AT is 10 games in the “N” game.
The sub-control board 80 displays the number of remaining games in the AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50 at the start of the “N” game eye.
Then, if the disconnection occurs in the course of the “N” game and the disconnection state continues even at the start of the “N + 1” game, the main control board 50 starts the “N + 1” game at the start (at the start). Although the process for transmitting the command of the remaining number of games (9 games) in the AT to the control board 80 is executed, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to disconnection). For this reason, in the “N + 1” game eyes, “the remaining 10 games” of the “N” game eyes remain displayed.

  Then, when the communication is restored in the middle of the “N + 1” game (after the middle left stop) and the game shifts to the “N + 2” game, at the start of the “N + 2” game, the main control board 50 On the other hand, a command for the remaining number of games (8 games) in the AT is transmitted. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example in which the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication return timing are the same as pattern 4, but the “N” game is the remaining one game of AT.
At the start of the “N” game (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 transmits a command of the remaining number of games (one remaining game) in the AT to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the remaining one game (from the display of the remaining two games so far).
When a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the “N” game, when the start of the “N + 1” game (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 sets the remaining number of games in the AT to 0. A command indicating that the game is a game is transmitted to the sub control board 80, but the sub control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as the pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the “N + 1” game eye, the display indicating that the remaining one game of the AT is continued.

Also, when ending the AT, the sub-control board 80 outputs an AT ending effect. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving a command indicating that the remaining number of games in the AT is 0 game (at the start of the game).
However, in the example of the pattern 5, the sub control board 80 does not receive the command indicating that the remaining number of games in the AT is 0 game, so that the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, at the end of the “N + 1” game, an effect indicating that there is one remaining game of the AT is output.

Then, when the “N + 1” game ends and shifts to the “N + 2” game, at the start of the “N + 2” game, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80. Send. Based on the reception of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of "1 remaining game" and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
At the end of the AT, an image such as "Pachinko / pachislot is a game machine to be enjoyed moderately" is displayed in order to prevent immersion. However, in the case of the pattern 5, the image display cannot be performed since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the “N + 1” game eye. Therefore, as a countermeasure, the game history is managed on the sub-control board 80 side, and when the game is shifted to the next game (in the example of FIG. 11, “N + 2” game) over the end of the AT, the game is At the start of the operation, the image display is performed.

  In the above patterns 1 to 5, when a disconnection occurs in the “N” game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection in the “N” game until the communication is restored, and “N + 1” When the communication is restored in the middle of the "game" eye, the continuation of the effect output as the "N" game eye is output based on the command received in the "N + 1" game eye. Therefore, for example, in the pattern 1, when the left stop command is received after the communication is restored at the “N + 1” game item, the correct answer is received regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct push order. A pressing order effect is output.

  On the other hand, in the pattern 1, for example, when the command of the middle stop is received after the communication is restored at the “N + 1” game item, the pressing order of the effect output at that time, ie, the “N” game item Since the incorrect push order is displayed for the middle left display, a push order failure effect is output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct push order. However, even if the push order failure effect is output in the “N + 1” game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct push order of the “N + 1” game, the pattern is advantageous to the player. Since the combination is stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

  As described above, when the communication is restored in the “N + 1” game item, the effect taking over the effect before the disconnection (“N” game item) is output in the “N + 1” game item, and the “N + 2” game item is output. Reset the effect at the start (return to the correct effect). Thereby, in any of the game in which the disconnection has occurred and the game in which the communication has been restored, the output of the unnatural effect can be minimized, and the player can be given as little misunderstanding as possible.

Also, in the example of FIG. 11, an example in which the communication is restored to the “N + 1” game after the disconnection occurred in the “N” game, but the communication is restored when two or more games have elapsed after the disconnection occurred. This is the same as FIG.
For example, when a disconnection occurs in the “N” game and communication is restored to the “N + a” game (a = “2” or more), the “N” game is disconnected up to the “N + a−1” game. The previous and previous effects continue to be output. Then, in the “N + a” game item where the communication is restored, the continuation of the effect of the “N” game that has been continuously output is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the “N + a + 1” game eye, the effect is updated to the effect at the start of the “N + a + 1” game eye (correct effect).

<Fourth embodiment>
The motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing when rotating and stopping the reel 31, and these are all in an excited state. When the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state is set in which a four-phase excitation is applied simultaneously for a predetermined time (time T11 described later) (hereinafter, referred to as a “four-phase excitation state”).
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 stops.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of legibility of the drawing. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that an actual product has a structure as shown in FIG. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pressed until it returns to the original state is illustrated in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the upper side than the front door 12 is the side seen from the player.
Furthermore, the line at which the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. The moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d comes into contact with the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12A, a stop button 42a is an operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated when the player turns on the stop switch 42 (pressed into the slot machine 10). The player side of the stop button 42a is disposed so as to protrude from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. This part has a substantially cylindrical shape when viewed from the front of the player. In the no-load state, the stop button 42a is urged in the F3 direction (outward direction, player direction) in FIG. 9A by the spring force of the (compression) coil spring 42c. An end of the player side 42 a protrudes from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion (hereinafter, referred to as a “flange-shaped portion”) of the stop button 42a in the drawing is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the housing), and is in contact with the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed in, and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. It is.

  A moving piece 42d that can move integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the lower surface side of the stop button 42a in the drawing. Further, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is disposed directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in FIG. 7A, in the state where the stop button 42a is urged toward the front door 12 by the urging force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (the lower end in the figure) of the moving piece 42d is It is arranged at a position distant from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e does not detect the moving piece 42d and is in the off state.

  Next, as shown in (b) in the figure, when stopping the rotation of the reel 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. Thus, the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing against the urging force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure, the moving piece 42d integral with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the figure. Thereby, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. FIG. 12B shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange portion of the stop button 42a has not yet contacted the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

  When the stop button 42a is further pushed in from the state of FIG. 12B, as shown in FIG. 12C, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a contacts the stopper 42c. This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pressed. In the state of FIG. 12C, the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, and the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state.

  When the player releases the pressing of the stop button 42a from the state of FIG. 12C (excluding the force in the direction F4 in FIG. 12C), the stop button 42a is pressed by the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c. A force to return to the initial position acts. Thus, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a move upward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not contact the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12D).

FIG. 12D shows the arrangement of the members at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state. In the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-shaped portion front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state of FIG. 12A, in which the stop button 42a is not loaded.
It should be noted that the state of FIG. 12B showing the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state and the state of FIG. Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if slight deviation occurs.

FIGS. 13A and 13B are time charts showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32 in the fourth embodiment, in which FIG. 13A shows Example 1 and FIG. Show.
13A, the stop button 42a is at the initial position in a no-load state (FIG. 12A), and the time at the moment when the stop button 42a starts to be pressed is S41. The time when the stop button 42a is pressed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. Further, the time when the stop button 42a is pushed from that position and the stop button 42a reaches the deepest part (when the state of FIG. 12C is reached) is defined as S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the pushing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from the time S41 to S43 becomes longer, and if the stop button 42a is pushed earlier, the time from the time S41 to S43 becomes shorter.

Next, at time S44, the pressing of the stop button 42a is released. At the time point S44, the stop button 42a is located at the deepest part.
When the pressing of the stop button 42a is released, as described above, a force for returning the stop button 42a to the initial position is exerted by the spring force of the coil spring 42c. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment when the pressing of the stop button 42a is released.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from on, that is, when the state shown in FIG. Here, the time from time S44 to S45 is defined as T11.

  The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (movement distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed such that the time T11 is 100 ms.

  On the other hand, when the ON of the stop switch 42 (specifically, the ON of the detection sensor 42e) is detected (when the state of FIG. 12B is reached), the reel control unit 65 controls the reel corresponding to the stop switch 42. The reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means). The time from the start of the stop control of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 (after the detection of the detection sensor 42e is turned on) is, as described above, (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). The number of moving frames is set within 190 ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, the number of moving frames is within 5 frames, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20, the number of moving frames is within 4 frames). Accordingly, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant, since it depends on the result of the lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Further, after moving the reel 31 to the predetermined position, the reel control means 65 sets the motor 32 to the state where the four phases are simultaneously excited (brake is applied) for the predetermined time (the above-described four-phase excitation state). ).
Here, the motor 32 in the present embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and performs, for example, a one- or two-phase excitation during rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31) (note that the motor is not limited to the one- and two-phase excitation). Absent). Therefore, even during the rotation of the motor 32, it is in one excited state. When the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, the motor is set to the four-phase excitation state.
When the bound stop is performed after the reel 31 is moved to the predetermined position (when the reel 31 is made to appear to vibrate at the stop position), for example, the three-phase excitation state is set instead of the four-phase excitation state. Is also possible.

  At the moment when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a possibility that the motor 32 or the reel 31 may exceed the position to be stopped due to inertia at the time of rotation. Therefore, at the moment when the reel 31 is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor 32 is stopped. By setting a four-phase excitation state and generating a static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stop position by inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, operation acceptance of the next stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, the operation acceptance of the next stop switch 42 is permitted because the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 is changed from the on state to the off state (return to the state of FIG. 12D). ) And when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 whose rotation drive has been stopped has ended.

Such control is performed for the following reason.
In order to hold the stop position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to the four-phase excitation state. However, when such control is performed, a larger load is applied than usual, so that the load of the entire slot machine 10 is reduced. It gets bigger. In order to reduce the load, the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is completed.

  In the example 1 of FIG. 13A, when the combination lottery result by the combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, at the time of pushing the bell in the pushing order), the four-phase excitation state is set. The excitation time T12 from the start to the end is set to 90 interrupts (2.235 × 90 = 201.15 ms). Here, when the role lottery result is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 in the four-phase excitation state is set to “90 interruption” because the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the role lottery result. Not necessarily.

Therefore, in the first example of the fourth embodiment, “T11 <T12” is set.
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from the time point S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As described above, when the number of moving frames during stop control when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21" is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20" Since the number of moving frames during the stop control is within four frames (minimum one frame), the reel 31 stops within approximately "40" to "190" ms from the time point S42.
On the other hand, the time (time from time S42 to S44) from the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state to the time when the stop button 42e reaches the deepest part and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released is , “40” to “180” ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the stop button 42a is released from being depressed are close times (substantially the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing when the pressing of the stop button 42a is released (time S44), and after the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state (time S45), The motor 32 is designed so that the four-phase excitation state ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is completed, it is possible to set so that the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the four-phase excitation state ends, the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. . Thereby, it is possible to progress the game at a high speed.

  On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13B, from the moment when the pressing of the stop button 42a reaching the deepest part is released (time S44), the detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off (at time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until it reaches) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than that of the first example. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
Then, in Example 2, as in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is assumed to be started from the moment when the stop button 42a reaching the deepest part is depressed (time S44). The design is such that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the setting can be made so that the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to end when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the operation acceptance of the next stop button 42a is permitted when the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. Thereby, it is possible to progress the game at a high speed.
As described above, each of Example 1 and Example 2 has an advantage in control.
Note that examples 1 and 2 in FIG. 13 show examples in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11 <T12", the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be completed at a higher speed in Example 1.

<Fifth embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to a relationship between turning on / off a power supply and starting a program.
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, in a time chart, an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a state in which a power failure occurs after the main program (program of the main control board 50) is started. The power supply is assumed to be turned on at time S51, and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), the supply of power to both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is started, and the main control board 50 and the The voltage level of the sub-control board 80 gradually increases, and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). In FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, the power-off detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as those in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

  After the power is turned on at time S51, the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 reach the supply level V0 is defined as S52. Thereafter, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 starts at time S53 when the time T22 has elapsed from time S52. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 starts at time S54 when a time T23 (T23> T22) has elapsed from time S52. The reason why the subprogram is started first and then the main program is started is that the main control board 50 transmits the first command after power-on to the subcontrol board 80. This is because the sub-control board 80 is ready to receive the command.

Next, when the power supply is cut off at time S55 (the power switch 11 is turned off or the power failure occurs, etc.), the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level decreases, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 can execute the power-off process if the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, when the power interruption occurs at time S55, the voltage becomes the power interruption detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interruptions) as in FIG. 3, and the power interruption is detected (time S56). Further, after the detection of the power-off, the power-off process is executed after one interrupt, for example, as in FIG. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
Thereafter, when the time reaches S58, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (process) cannot be executed. For this reason, control is performed so that the power-off process ends before the time S58 is reached.

When the main program is started at time S54, setting of the main CPU 55, checking of the RWM 53, checking whether or not the previous power-off was normal, checking of the state of the setting key switch, and the like are executed, and thereafter, interrupt processing is started. . When the setting key switch is off, a power-off recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after the start of the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to the setting change process after the start of the interrupt process.
Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the power is turned off after the main program is started and the setting key switch is off, the power-off processing is executed after the power-off recovery processing is completed. I do. Thus, the program can be terminated normally.
On the other hand, when the power is turned off after the main program is started and the setting key switch is on, the power-off processing is executed without starting the setting change processing. This is because if the setting change process is performed after the power is cut off, a problem may occur.

Further, in order to execute the main program normally, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed even when the power-off is detected at the same time as the activation of the main program.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, even if the power is cut off after that, the program is always executed until the interrupt is started. This is to detect power interruption in interrupt processing. As in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the “N” th interrupt, a voltage drop (power-off detection level V1) at which it is determined that power-off has occurred is detected, and the next “N + 1” game item is detected. However, when the voltage drop is detected, power interruption is detected at the (N + 1) th interrupt (determined as power interruption). Then, the power-off process is executed from the “N + 2” interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program is started at time S54, and the power is cut off at time S55 thereafter. However, the setting is made so that the power-off process can be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2 even if the power-off occurs at the same time as the time S54 (start of the main program).
In FIG. 14A, during the time T21 from when the power is turned on (time S51) to when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52), the voltage is changed to the low level from the occurrence of the power interruption (time S55). It is set so as to be shorter than the time T24 until it becomes.
The time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 to when the main program is started) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14B shows an example in which a power failure occurs before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51, and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, the time S59 is before the time S54 in FIG. That is, after the power supply (supply level V0) required for starting the main program is supplied, the power supply is cut off before the predetermined time (time T23) has elapsed (before reaching time S54), and the voltage has dropped. It is an example. In such a case, the main program does not start. Therefore, thereafter, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply goes to the low level.
In the example of FIG. 14B, when the power is turned on again, the apparatus can be started normally.
Although not shown in FIG. 14, it is conceivable that a power failure may occur immediately after the subprogram starts (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program starts). It is.
When the power interruption occurs at the above timing, the subprogram executes the power interruption processing of the subprogram. Then, before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2, the power-off processing of the sub-program can be ended.
Further, since the power-off at the above timing is a power-off before the main program is started, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the present embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 increases the accuracy of the medal insertion determination and is also effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 need not be provided, and only the pair of input sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medals M that move in a substantially horizontal direction, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is falling substantially vertically downward, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b may detect the medal M.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but is not limited to this. Before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, any function having a function of sending the medal M out of the medal path may be used.
Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are illustrated so as to detect a position slightly above the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product is configured as described above. It does not mean. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they are arranged so as to reliably detect the passing medal M.

  (4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when the medal M is located at M4, but is not limited to this. For example, the time from the moment when the medal M is at the position M1 in FIG. 2 until the medal M reaches M4 may be set to T2, and “T2> T1” may be set. Alternatively, the time from when the medal M reaches M4 from any one of the predetermined positions between M1 and M2 may be set to T2, and “T2> T1” may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, the power-off process is executed until the medal M reaches the position M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off processing.
Alternatively, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, the power-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Further, in the first embodiment (A), a power supply interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, and the time T1 from when the power supply interruption is detected to when the power supply interruption processing (blocker off) is executed. May be set to be shorter than the time from when the medal M reaches the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position of the medal M (this time is referred to as “T2 ′”). With this setting, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off. Therefore, the medal can be prevented from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above description, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment when the user releases his / her hand at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power interruption processing (blocker off) is executed in the interruption processing following the interruption processing in which the power interruption is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the power-off process (blocker off) may be set to be performed after the “2” to “5” interrupt processes, counting from the interrupt process that detects the power-off. Alternatively, the power-off process (blocker off) may be executed by an interrupt process that detects the power-off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, when the power supply is cut off, the time T0 until the voltage reaches the maintenance level V1 from the supply level V0 is set to 20 interrupts, but is not limited to this. Various settings can be made without depending on the performance of the power supply.

  (9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is paid out by the medal payout device, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the payout medal M itself. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the medal M (paid out).

In the case where the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged as described above, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Payout sensor 37a on, payout sensor 37b off (time S31 ')
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b ON (time S32 ')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b on (time S33 ')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b off (time S34 ')
Follow the course of.
Then, the time from time S31 ′ to S34 ′ is set so as to be shorter than time T1 (time from the occurrence of power interruption to the execution of power interruption processing).

  (10) In the second embodiment, the gate trace 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the concave portion 57c are on the outside. Conversely, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the concave portion 57c are on the inside. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate trace 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. 10B, the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 becomes a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape is as shown in FIG. 10C, a protrusion 57e is formed outside the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

  (11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the board case 56, an example in which the main control board 50 is housed inside is described. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to another control board for which fraud is to be prevented, for example, a board case of the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, the ROM 54, the sub CPU 85, and the like. On the upper surface of the upper cover in the board case of the sub control board 80, at least the sub The CPU 85 may not be disposed, and the RWM 83 and the ROM 54 may not be disposed. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 may be prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate mark.

(12) In the third embodiment, the pressing order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the number of remaining games during AT are taken as examples. The third embodiment can be applied to the case of displaying the number of acquired games (BB game and the like) and the remaining number of acquireable games.
For example, the acquired number at the start of the “N” game item is “200”, the acquired number at the start of the “N + 1” game item is “209”, and the acquired number at the start of the “N + 2” game item is “ Assume that there were 218 "sheets. Further, the main control board 50 transmits a command relating to the acquired number to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game.
Then, as in the example illustrated in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs in the middle of the “N” game, and communication is restored in the middle of the “N + 1” game.

  In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays “200” as the acquired number for the “N” game item. Also, at the start of the “N + 1” game eye, since the command related to the acquired number is not received (due to disconnection), the “N + 1” game eye also maintains the display of the acquired number “200”. Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives the command regarding the acquired number at the start of the “N + 2” game eyes, the sub-control board 80 updates the display to the acquired number “218” based on the command.

  (13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the “N + 2” game eye. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be returned to normal after all stops of the “N + 1” game or when a betting operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, it is also possible to return the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time of a full stop or after the full stop.

  (14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of a disconnected “N + 1” game, there may be a case where an additional (additional) lottery in the AT can be won or the number of games that can be acquired or the number of games played. In this case, since the “N + 1” game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive a command based on winning in the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the “N + 2” game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the “N + 2” game, the sub-control board 80 To display the game information (acquirable number or the number of games) after the addition.

  (15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, when the line is disconnected after the first right stop of the “N” game and the communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the “N + 1” game is operated. Can be considered. Then, in the "N + 1" th game, it is assumed that the player has made the first right stop. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the command of the right first stop in the “N + 1” game item, it means that the sub-control board 80 has received the stop command of the stop switch 42 that has been already operated. Output. Then, the image display may be returned to a normal state at the time of the bet operation after the entire stop of the “N + 1” game or at the start of the “N + 2” game.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when displaying the acquired number of images during the AT, the following method may be used as the update processing of the image display of the acquired number of images before and after the disconnection.
When the payout process is performed, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the acquired number to the sub control board 80. Here, when a disconnection occurs during the “N” game eyes, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the acquired number of “N” game eyes. Immediately before the disconnection of the “N” game, the sub-control board 80 displays “100” as the acquired number during the AT. Further, it is assumed that the “N” game item and the “N + 1” game item in the AT each acquire 10 cards.
In this case, the acquired number during the AT at the end of the “N” game eye should be “110” originally, but remains “100” (because the line is disconnected). Then, it is assumed that the communication is restored in the course of the “N + 1” game. This allows the sub-control board 80 to return the acquired number during AT to a normal value based on the acquired number command received during the payout process for the “N + 1” game. Here, the value may be returned to a normal value during the payout process of the “N + 1” game, or may be returned to a normal value at the start of the “N + 2” game, as in the example of FIG. Furthermore, it may be updated to "110" at the time of the payout process of the "N + 1" game, and may be updated to "120" at the start of the "N + 2" game.

  (17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is applicable to, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. In pachinko machines, the starting port (the winning opening which starts the symbol change by the symbol change display device and obtains the random number for the jackpot lottery), the electric chew winning opening (when the game ball wins, the next winning A winning opening provided with an accessory that opens for a certain period of time and then closes to make it easier.Electric chutes are not limited to tulip shapes.) Provided. The first embodiment (B) can be applied to these winning ports.

Specifically, for example, a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has won a winning port) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after being detected by the winning sensor) are provided at the starting port. Is provided. Further, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has won the attacker) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of the starting port, when the power is cut off at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the discharge sensor is set to be able to detect the game ball before the power-off process is executed. Thereby, even if a power failure occurs at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the prize ball can be correctly counted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a prize ball from not being paid out even if a game ball has won the winning opening. The same applies to the V prize sensor and the discharge sensor of the attacker.

  (18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines. However, the slot machine 10 is installed in a fourth branch that is subject to the Wind Management Law. The present invention is not limited to a so-called “pachi-slot gaming machine”, and can be applied to, for example, a casino machine and an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) that does not use medals to be used for games as game media.

Here, the enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) in FIG. 1, for example. Also, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can be made unnecessary. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded by winning the combination are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of “99,999” electronic medals can be stored).
The present invention can be applied to all of the above-described embodiments and the following embodiments, except for the first embodiment, even in such a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine).

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
FIG. 15A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state before the last discharged medal contacts the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state before rotation of the hopper disk 101, which is in a state before contacting the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and which is more advanced than FIG.

Further, FIG. 16A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state where the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state where the movable shaft 38b has been moved by being pushed.
Further, FIG. 17A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the disk has stopped.

  In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. Further, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 as in the first embodiment. Then, the main control board 50 controls the driving of the hopper motor 36.

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, and the hopper disk 101 has a holding portion which is an opening capable of holding medals stored in the hopper. Eighths 102 are provided along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding part 102 is formed in a circular hole shape penetrating from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101. The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed so as to enter the respective holding units 102 from the upper openings of the respective holding units 102 and to be respectively held by the respective holding units 102.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disk 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in the respective holders 102 move in a clockwise arc together with the hopper disk 101 and are sequentially discharged from the discharge unit 103.
When a medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103, the holding unit 102 holding the medal becomes empty. Then, another medal stored in the hopper 35 newly enters the empty holding unit 102.

In addition, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, a portion between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is a discharge portion 103 from which medals are discharged.
As shown in FIG. 16B, when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and when the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes larger than the diameter of the medal, the medal becomes the fixed shaft 38a. And the movable shaft 38b. At this time, medals are discharged from the discharge unit 103.
At the moment when the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103. It is a moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medal has been discharged from the discharge unit 103.

Further, in one payout process, the medal finally discharged from the discharge unit 103 is referred to as “final discharge medal”, and in the next payout process, the medal first discharged from the discharge unit 103 is referred to as “first medal”. This will be referred to as “emission medal”.
15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medal with the letter “A” is the last ejected medal in one payout process, and the medal with the letter “B” is the first ejected medal in the next payout process.

Further, the position of the holding unit 102 at which the last ejected medal is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as a “first position”, and one payout is performed. The position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in the process is referred to as a “second position”.
FIG. 17A shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 (the hopper disk 101, each holding unit 102, each medal with characters “A” to “D”, the fixed shaft 38a). , And the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17A, the position of the holding unit 102 where the medal with the letter “A” is held is the first position, and the medal with the letter “B” is held. The position of the holding unit 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when ending one payout process, the main control board 50 moves the holding unit 102 holding the first discharge medal in the next payout process to the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the state between them.
FIG. 17B illustrates a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 has stopped after the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting unit 103. In FIG. 17B, the first position and the second position are indicated by broken lines, respectively. In FIG. 17B, the medal with the letter “B” is the first medal to be discharged in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17B, the hopper disk 101 is held in a state where the holding unit 102 holding the medal with the letter “B” is located between the first position and the second position. Has stopped rotating.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
For this reason, at the end of the payout process, the drive of the hopper motor 36 is suddenly stopped by flowing a current in a direction opposite to the direction of discharging the medals from the main control board 50 to the hopper motor 36, and the hopper disk 101 is stopped. Can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, that effect is detected by the payout sensor 37.
For this reason, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting unit 103, a current in a direction opposite to the direction in which the medal is ejected is supplied to the hopper motor 36 to rotate the hopper disk 101. When the abrupt stop is performed, the holding unit 102 holding the first discharge medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Further, by supplying a current in the opposite direction to the hopper motor 36 when discharging medals, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the reverse direction, and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise rotation). .
For this reason, at the end of the payout process, even if the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals in the next payout process has passed the second position, the hopper supplies a current in the opposite direction to the direction in which the medals are ejected. By flowing through the motor 36, the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction and returned to the second position.
Then, by returning the holding unit 102 holding the first discharged medals to the second position, the first discharged medals can start moving from the same second position every time. Thus, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first discharged medal can be stably discharged.

Here, the DC motor as the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates from a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped when a constant current flows, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart illustrating a relationship between a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, a drive state of the hopper motor 36, and a medal discharge state from the discharge unit 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18, an upper line indicates a driving signal of the hopper motor 36, a middle line indicates a driving state of the hopper motor 36, and a lower line indicates a state of discharging medals from the discharging unit 103.

The drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port of the main control board 50. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 changes from off to on, a constant current is supplied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 changes from ON to OFF, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes “0”.
Further, in FIG. 18, “stop” in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and “constant speed” in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft is at a constant speed. (Constant speed) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 changes from off to on, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop", and then reaches "constant speed".
Further, a portion where the line indicating the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is obliquely upward and to the right indicates that the rotation of the driving shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated.

As described above, in the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor, when the drive signal is turned on from off, the rotation of the drive shaft is gradually accelerated.
Therefore, when the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated until the holding unit 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than a medal discharge interval at a constant speed.
That is, when the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving of the hopper motor 36 to the ejection of the first ejected medals from the ejecting unit 103 is increased. This is longer than the medal discharge interval when the drive shaft 36 is rotating at a constant speed.
As a result, there is a possibility that the player may feel that the ejection of the first (first) medal has been delayed.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the end of one payout process, the main control board 50 causes the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process to move between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled such that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 stops in the position.
When the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance until reaching the first position is shorter than when stopping at the second position. . As a result, the time required to reach the first position is shorter than when stopping at the second position. Therefore, even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated, the first (first) medal is obtained. It is possible not to give the player the feeling that the discharge of the is delayed.

When the holding unit 102 for holding the first ejected medals is stopped between the first position and the second position, as shown in FIG. 17B, two adjacent holding units 102 in the hopper disk 101 are stopped. Is located in front of the discharge unit 103.
As a result, an illegal device such as a wire is inserted from a medal payout opening provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12, and an illegal operation (goto operation) of trying to access the holding unit 102 of the hopper disk 101 with the unauthorized device is performed. Even if it does, the portion between the two adjacent holding portions 102 in the hopper disk 101 becomes a barrier, so that access to the holding portion 102 by an unauthorized device can be prevented.

When the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is “constant speed”, the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in each holding unit 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharge unit 103 at equal intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is changed from ON to OFF, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from “constant speed”, and then reaches “stop”.
In FIG. 18, the portion of the line indicating the driving state of the hopper motor 36 that is obliquely downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases.

As described above, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor is gradually reduced when the drive signal is changed from on to off.
Then, the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 by passing between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (the ejecting unit 103) and returning the movable shaft 38b to the original position. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 switches the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decelerates, and the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. Thus, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 stops.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80 thereafter. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started payout processing.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 starts processing related to the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off from on, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80 thereafter. The payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout processing.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the processing related to the output of the payout sound. Thus, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the “payout sound” means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as “purururu” can be output from the speaker 22.
In addition, the “process related to output of payout sound” includes a series of processes such as a process of selecting a sound to be output, a process of selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and a process of outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. Is what it means. By executing this series of processing, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

  When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the main control board 50 performs a process related to output of a payout sound. Is started, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started by the time the first discharge medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103.

Further, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, Is completed, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be ended when the discharge of the medal from the discharge unit 103 is stopped.
Thereby, it is possible to give the player the impression that the payout of the medals and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a relationship among the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of discharging medals from the discharging unit 103.
When the winning combination is won, the main control board 50 sets the number-of-payouts data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
For example, when a winning combination of 10 wins and payout of 10 medals, “10” is set as the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
That is, when paying out “N” medals (N ≧ 1), “N” is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

In addition, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts up (starts driving) from the "stopped" state, reaches "constant speed" through "acceleration".
At the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of the operation, the hopper motor 36 reaches "constant speed" by the time the holding unit 102 holding the first discharge medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding unit 102 for holding the first ejected medals is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches “constant speed” before the holding unit 102 for holding the first ejected medals reaches the first position. are doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 reaches the “constant speed” from the “stop” through the “acceleration”, the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal reaches the first position, whereby the first ejection medal is obtained. The medals are surely discharged from the discharge unit 103.
Further, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off.
The timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37a is set so that the state where the movable piece 39a is detected is turned off, and the state where the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned on.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to high active similarly to the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37b is set so that the state where the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned off, and the state where the movable piece 39a is detected is turned on.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off.
In the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the payout sensor 37b is set to high active, respectively. Waveforms are reversed on and off.

At the timing (b) in FIG. 19, the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b to move the movable shaft 38b, so that the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
The state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (c) in FIG. 19, the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes larger than the medal diameter, the payout sensor 37a is turned on, and the payout sensor 37b is turned on. Become. At this time, medals are discharged from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharge unit 103).
The state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, at the timing (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is being urged by the spring 39b and is in the process of returning to the original position, and the payout sensor 37a is on and the payout sensor 37b is off. It becomes.
The state (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
At the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b to return to the original position, and both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been discharged, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out the "N" medals, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N" medals have been discharged.
When determining that the “N” th medal has been discharged, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 reaches "stop" through "deceleration".
Thus, the payout process for the “N” medals is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, payout number data is set. This process is a process of storing payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out “N” medals (N ≧ 1), “N” is stored as payout number data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is pushed by the medal and moves) is turned on. It is set to be.

If “Yes” is determined in step S103, the process proceeds to the next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, if “Yes” in the step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" in step S104, an error occurs.
If the payout sensor 37b is already on when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, "No" is determined in step S104. In this case, it is conceivable that medals are jammed in the ejection unit 103 (medal jam error). When a medal clogging error occurs, the clogged medal is removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the error continues until the reset switch is operated. Then, when the jammed medals are removed and the reset switch is operated, the error is released.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if “No” continues for a predetermined time in step S <b> 103 (the predetermined time has elapsed with “No”), an error occurs. In this case, the medal in the hopper 35 may be empty (hopper empty error). When a hopper empty error occurs, medals are replenished in the hopper 35 (the cause of the error is removed), and the error continues until the reset switch is operated. Then, when medals are replenished in the hopper 35 and the reset switch is operated, the error is released.
In step S105, the main control board 50 determines again whether the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if “Yes” in the step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" in step S105, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104.

  In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37b is on. If “Yes” is determined in step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 determines again whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if “Yes” in the step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, if “No” in step S107, an error occurs as in the case of “No” in step S104 or S105.

In step S108, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. If “Yes” is determined in step S108, the process proceeds to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37a is off. If “Yes” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37b is off.
If “Yes” in the step S110, the process proceeds to the next step S111. On the other hand, if “No” in step S110, an error occurs as in the case of “No” in step S104, S105, or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the payout number data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and storing the subtracted data as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout amount data is “0”. Here, if “Yes” in the step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if “No” in the step S112, the process returns to the step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout amount data becomes “0”.

Here, the medals discharged from the discharge unit 103 are usually guided to a medal tray through a passage called a medal shoot.
However, in rare cases, the medals discharged from the discharge unit 103 may hit the inner wall of the medal chute, bounce off, and return to the discharge unit 103. At this time, the repelled medals may hit the medals to be ejected next from the ejection unit 103 and push back the medals to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is repeatedly determined in the order of “payout sensor 37a” → “payout sensor 37b” as in steps S103 to S110 in the flow chart of the payout processing of FIG. I do.
As a result, it is possible to detect an error such that a medal to be discharged from the discharge unit 103 is pushed back.

For example, it is assumed that one medal is about to be ejected, and that this medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, thereby moving the movable shaft 38b, so that the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off. (Timing (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that a medal paid out before this medal bounces back and hits this medal, this medal is pushed back, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is obtained in step S105 in FIG. 20, and an error occurs.
Further, for example, it is assumed that the medal is pushed back at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, “No” is obtained in step S107 in FIG. 20, and an error occurs.

<Modification of the sixth embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with the eight holding portions 102, but the number of the holding portions is not limited to eight. It can be set appropriately according to the situation.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disk 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape. That is, the holding unit 102 is not limited to a circular hole as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disk 101 in the medal payout process is clockwise. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disk 101 rotates counterclockwise and May be sequentially discharged from the discharge unit 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, but may be, for example, the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. Even with such a flow of the payout processing, the discharge of the medals can be detected. However, in such a flow of the payout process, it is not possible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected next is pushed back by a medal bounced on the inner wall of the medal shoot.
20 and FIG. 21, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modified examples described in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Seventh embodiment>
It relates to the arrangement of a main control board 50 attached inside the cabinet 13 and a sub control board 80 attached to the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 in a state where the front door 12 is closed, and is a view for explaining a positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 whose front side is open, and a front door 12 which is attached to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13.
The cabinet 13 is formed in a box shape with an open front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right plate, a left plate, a top plate, and the like.
Further, a medal payout device 15 is disposed below the inside of the cabinet 13 (on the bottom plate 13a). The medal payout device 15 is for paying out medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. Have.

Further, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by a back plate 13b, a right plate, and a left plate is provided above the medal payout device 15 inside the cabinet 13, and a symbol is provided on the reel base 110. A display device 14 is provided.
The symbol display device 14 includes a rectangular frame-shaped reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged side by side inside the reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by a reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel board case 121 is disposed on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control board 120 is accommodated in the reel board case 121. The reel control board 120 controls the driving of the three motors 32.

A transparent main board case 56 is arranged inside the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed to a position on the front side (the inner side of the housing) of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 at a position corresponding to a position above the symbol display device 14. The main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 has a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a medal payout device 15, a reel control board 120, a sub control board via an input port 51 or an output port 52. 80 and the like are electrically connected.

  Further, the front door 12 is attached so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed. More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. When the front door 12 rotates about the hinge, the front opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.

A transparent display window is provided at the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Then, the player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
Further, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are arranged on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window. .

Furthermore, a medal payout opening, which is an opening through which the medal paid out from the medal payout device 15 passes, and a medal paid out from the medal payout opening are received below the front side (player side) of the front door 12. A medal tray is arranged.
Further, at an upper portion on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are arranged.

In addition, a transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged on the upper portion of the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed to a position on the back side of the front door 12 (the inner side of the housing), above the symbol display device 14 and on the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is housed in the sub-board case 87.
The sub-control board 80 controls an effect, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. The effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, and the like are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. Then, the sub-control board 80 determines what kind of effect to output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and according to the determination, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, The output of the image display device 23 is controlled.

As described above, the main board case 56 is disposed above the symbol display device 14 in the cabinet 13, and the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
A sub-board case 87 is disposed above the symbol display device 14 on the back surface of the front door 12, and a sub-control board 80 is accommodated in the sub-board case 87.
Then, as shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
Further, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 when the front door 12 is closed is set to be wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

  Here, on the sub-control board 80, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for power storage is arranged. The electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 ruptures due to a failure, the filled electrolytic solution may be scattered. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a problem, the scattered electrolytic solution is removed. The main CPU 55 may adhere to the main CPU 55 and cause a malfunction. In addition, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 may be damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged on the sub-control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55.
Thus, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a problem and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and thus the main CPU 55 does not malfunction. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from being damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures.
If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the main CPU 55 may malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. By disposing the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. Can be.

FIG. 23A shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure showing Example 1.
In FIG. 23A, a circle shown by a broken line is a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 onto the main control board 50.

In the example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the number of the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one. It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
Thus, by disposing the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 at a different position in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The position of the electrolytic capacitor 86 can be a position on the main control board 50 other than the position facing the main CPU 55.

<Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, but may be two, for example, as shown in FIG.
FIG. 23B shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure showing Example 2.

In FIG. 23B, similarly to FIG. 23A, a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 on the main control board 50 is indicated by a broken line.
In FIG. 23B, the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both located at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Thus, also in Example 2 of FIG. 23B, the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are arranged at positions other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be, for example, four as shown in FIG.
FIG. 24C shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure showing Example 3.
The fact that the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is projected on the main control board 50 and is indicated by a dashed circle is the same as in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b).

In FIG. 24C, the sub control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Are located. The remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction but different from the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the horizontal direction.
Even in such an arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located at positions other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position off the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24D shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 4.
The electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are projected and indicated by broken-line circles, as in FIGS. 23 (a), 23 (b) and 24 (c).

In FIG. 24D, the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, as in FIG. 23A. However, unlike FIG. 86 is arranged at a position off the main control board 50.
As described above, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position deviated from the main control board 50, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Will be.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a), 23 (b), 24 (c) and 24 (d), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is moved to a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. In this case, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a problem and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 can malfunction. Can be prevented from waking up.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, on the main control board 50, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as a “role ratio monitor”) is arranged. The management information display LED 74 displays management information such as an advantageous section ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a character ratio.
Further, the “advantageous section ratio” means the ratio of the advantageous section to the entire game section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section), and the “continuous bonus ratio” is the first to the total medal acquisition number. The ratio of the number of obtained medals when the special special role (RB) is activated means the ratio of the number of obtained medals during the operation of the special purpose, with respect to the total number of obtained medals.

Then, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74. Good.
Thus, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured due to a problem and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and thus the management displayed on the management information display LED 74. Information can be prevented from being unrecognizable.
Further, it is possible to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modifications described in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to a gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front part (A in FIG. 22) of the slot machine 10 in a state where the front door 12 is closed. A gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 will be described. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, a lower part of the cabinet 13 is provided with a first closing part 13c that projects toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-like projecting portion that projects forward from the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the projecting direction of the first closing portion 13c. Are directed to the front door 12.
The first closing portion 13c is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to a front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position below the first closing portion 13c at a lower portion of the front door 12, a second closing portion 12a protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-shaped projecting portion that projects rearward from the lower rear surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the projecting direction of the second closing portion 12a is The direction is the cabinet 13 direction.

Further, the second closing part 12a is arranged at a position below the first closing part 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower portion of the back surface of the front door 12.
Further, similarly to the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a is formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to a lower portion of the rear surface of the front door 12 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position above the first closing portion 13c at a lower portion of the front door 12, a third closing portion 12b protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, similarly to the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is a plate-like projecting portion projecting rearward from the lower rear portion of the front door 12, and the third closing portion 12b is in the closed state when the front door 12 is closed. The projecting direction of the three closing portions 12b is the direction of the cabinet 13.

Similarly to the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower rear portion of the front door 12.
Furthermore, unlike the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is arranged at a position above the first closing part 13c.
Further, the third closing portion 12b is also formed of a sheet metal similarly to the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, and is fixed to a lower portion of the rear surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing part 13c is arranged between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b.
For this reason, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing is bent as shown in FIG. Shape. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act (goto act) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 to the inside of the housing.

Further, a door sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. This door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting / receiving unit, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Further, on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, there is provided a detection piece that is movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is urged by a spring to jump forward.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in the state of detecting the detection piece and is in the off state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, in a state where the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece jumps forward by being urged by the spring, and goes out of the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where the detection piece is not detected, and is in an ON state.

Then, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is on.
As described above, the detection piece moves in the front-rear direction due to the opening and closing of the front door 12, and the opening and closing of the front door 12 is detected by turning on / off the door sensor.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed state, goes out of the state where it enters the door sensor, and goes out of the OFF state to the ON state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a “detection start position”.
Further, the time when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door 12 for the first time means the moment when the door sensor changes from the OFF state to the ON state.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are located between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. 13c is formed.
That is, even when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor is turned on from the off state, the first closing part 13c is disposed between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b. It is formed as follows.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor is first turned from the off state to the on state, and thereafter, the first closing part 13c comes out from between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b. Will be.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open, and transmits a door open command to the sub control board 80. The sub control board 80 Is received, the fact that the front door 12 is open is notified by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 or the like. Thereby, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the front door 12 is open.

  Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, the first closing portion 13c does not come out from between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, and the front door 12 is opened. Also at the position where the notification of the start is made, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 has a bent shape. It is possible to prevent an illegal act (going act) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing through.

  In the sixth embodiment, the holding unit 102 for holding the first ejected medals is stopped between the first position and the second position, so that the holding unit 102 between the two adjacent holding units 102 in the hopper disk 101 is stopped. The corresponding portion can be located in front of the discharge unit 103, and thereby, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of accessing the holding unit 102 of the hopper disk 101 by inserting a wire or the like from the medal payout opening. As described above, by providing both configurations of the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent an illegal act of accessing the medal payout device 15 by inserting a wire or the like.

Here, the distance between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a is "h1", the distance between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b is "h2", and the second closing part 12a The distance from the third closing portion 12b is “h3”, and the projection width (depth) of the second closing portion 12a is “w”.
The diameter of the medal is "d", and the thickness of the medal is "t".
Note that the size of a general medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set so as to satisfy “h2> t”. ing.

Here, when a store clerk in the hall opens the front door 12 and refills the hopper 35 with medals, the medals may be dropped on the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
In particular, there is a case where medals are dropped near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c, in order to replenish medals to the hopper 35 from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13.

  At this time, if the setting is made such that “h2> t” is satisfied, even if the front door 12 is closed while the medal falls near the first closing portion 13c, the medal falling near the first closing portion 13c , Between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. Further, there is no possibility that the medal is caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, and the front door 12 does not close.

In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12 a and the medal diameter “d” is set so as to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”. Have been.
By setting so as to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”, it is possible to prevent a medal from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
Thus, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed in a state where a medal is placed on the second closing portion 12a. 12 and the cabinet 13 can be prevented from being damaged.

<Modification of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using the optical sensor having the light emitting and receiving unit, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured using, for example, a proximity sensor.
When the door sensor is configured using the proximity sensor, not only in the state where the front door 12 is closed but also in the state where the front door 12 is in the detection start position, the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b It is configured such that the first closing part 13c is disposed between the first and second parts.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. When the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is urged by a spring and protrudes forward. To get out of the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided on the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the door sensor. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 goes out of the door sensor. It may be.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side, but is not limited to this, and may be provided on the front door 12 side, for example.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is turned off when the detection piece is detected, and is turned on when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be turned on when the detection piece is detected, and may be turned off when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. The configuration is as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Further, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower portion of the lower surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a. It may be composed of the three members described above.
Similarly to the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be formed of two members or may be formed of three members.
As described above, the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a, and the third closing part 12b are not limited to the case where they are formed of one member, but may be formed of a plurality of members.

Further, the first closing portion 13c does not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and for example, the first closing portion 13c is provided near the right end or the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. It may have some parts that are not present.
Similarly, a lower portion of the rear surface of the front door 12 may have a portion where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
As described above, even if the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a, and the third closing part 12b are partially provided with no portion, the space between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 causes the inside of the housing to enter. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like through a wire or the like.
Further, the first closing portion 13c may be a part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be a part of the front door 12 or may be separate members from the front door 12.

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is formed between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, or the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b, and the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b may be in contact with each other.
Further, the entirety of the first closing portion 13c may be disposed between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, or a portion of the first closing portion 13c may be disposed. Is also good.

Furthermore, with the front door 12 closed, the first closing portion 13c may be in contact with a position corresponding to a position between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b on the back surface of the front door 12. .
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing portion 13c protruding toward the cabinet 13 from a lower portion of the back surface of the front door 12 is provided. A protruding second closing portion 12a may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b protruding toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 may be provided.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set to satisfy “h2> t”. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be set so as to satisfy “h2 <t”.
When setting so as to satisfy “h2> t”, when the front door 12 is closed in a state where the medals have dropped near the first closing portion 13c, the medals that have dropped near the first closing portion 13c become the third closing portion. It hits the rear end of 12 b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 being damaged. Further, there is no possibility that the medal is caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, and the front door 12 does not close.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d” is set so as to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”. did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy, for example, “(d / 2) <w <d”.
By satisfying “(d / 2) <w”, medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. In addition, by satisfying “w <d”, even if the front door 12 is to be closed with a medal placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 is closed on the second closing portion 12a before closing. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medal is placed on the second closed portion 12a, and thus the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a to the hall clerk. The door 12 can be removed and the front door 12 can be closed.

(9) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal “d”, and the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal of the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set so as to satisfy “(d / 2) <w” and “h1 <t”.
As described above, by satisfying “(d / 2) <w”, a medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “h1 <t”, even if the front door 12 is to be closed with the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 is closed before the front door 12 closes. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the first closing portion 13c, the front door 12 does not close.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medal is placed on the second closed portion 12a, and thus the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a to the hall clerk. The door 12 can be removed and the front door 12 can be closed.

(10) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal “d”, and the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal of the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set so as to satisfy “d <w” and “h1> t”.
By satisfying “d <w”, the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a without a part of the medals protruding from the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “h1> t”, a medal can be inserted between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal placed on the second closing part 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medal set between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a. Will be. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 being damaged. In addition, the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a does not hit the first closing portion 13c or the front end of the cabinet 13 so that the front door 12 cannot be closed.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications described in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Ninth embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to the control of stopping the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side and the control of the output of the effect on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26 (a) is a diagram showing types of special combinations (gears) and termination conditions, and FIG. 26 (b) is a diagram showing types of game states and a prescribed number of each game state. (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal drawing in the setting 1, and the advantageous section drawing.

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the ninth embodiment, BB (first-class accessory continuous operating device; first-class big bonus) and RB (first-class special bonus) are provided as special roles (casings). Regular bonus), and MB (second-type accessory continuous operation device; second-type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is continuously executed. During the RB game, the winning probability of the small role is increased. Furthermore, when the payout number of medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Further, when the payout number of medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

  The MB is a device that can continuously operate a CB (a second special occasion). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the role lottery means 61, all the small wins are repeatedly won, and the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment when the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is one). Further, the CB game ends in one game, and when the number of paid out medals in the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), in the ninth embodiment, the game state includes seven non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, RB game, BB game, and MB game. I have. Then, the main control board 50 controls the transition of these game states.
Here, the “specified number” means the number of inserted medals for which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the specified number in the MB is set to “1”, and the specified number in a game state other than the MB is set to “3”.

Further, "RT" means that the type (number) of the condition device (combination, replay, small combination) and the probability of winning the lottery are unique lottery states.
Furthermore, “non-RT” does not mean that the condition device is not included in the concept of RT, but that the type of the condition device to be drawn and the winning probability are different from those of RT.
In any game state, if the start condition of the RT is satisfied, the next game is shifted to the RT, and if the end condition of the RT is satisfied in the RT, the next game is shifted to the non-RT.

When the special combination is won, the winning information of the special combination is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the selected special combination stops on the activated line.
A game that has not been won as a special role is called "non-internal", and has been won as a special role. Games that carry information are called "inside".

Further, the probability that a desired symbol to be stopped and displayed on the activated line can be stopped on the activated line during the period from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped (maximum number of moving frames) is set to “pull-in”. Rate (PB). "
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (effective). It is referred to as “PB # 1” if the line cannot be drawn).
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled) to the active line. Called "PB = 1".

When the player wins the BB and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the activated line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game starts from the next game. During the BB game, the RB game is continuously executed, so that the winning probability of the small win increases. When the payout number of medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is terminated, and the game state returns to the game state before shifting to the BB game from the next game.
Furthermore, if the BB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the active line. The gaming state in which the winning information of BB is carried over is called “BB inside”.
The transition timing to the inside of the BB can be appropriately set. For example, in the game having won the BB, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the game may be shifted to the inside of the BB after the stop of all the reels 31. In the game having won the BB, the game may not be shifted to the inside of the BB, and It may be shifted inside.

Further, when the player wins the RB and the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on the activated line (RB wins), there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the RB game is started from the next game. During the RB game, the winning probability of the small role increases. When the payout number of medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is terminated, and the game state returns to the game state before shifting to the RB game from the next game.
Furthermore, if the RB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop at the active line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops at the active line. The gaming state in which the winning information of the RB is carried over is referred to as “RB inside”.
Note that the transition timing to the inside of the RB can be appropriately set similarly to the transition timing to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game having won the RB, the game may be shifted to the inside of the RB after stopping all the reels 31. In the game having won the RB, the game may not be shifted to the inside of the RB. It may be shifted inside.

  Further, when the player wins the MB and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the activated line (MB wins), there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the MB game is started from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. When the payout number of medals during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is terminated, and the game state returns from the next game to the game state before shifting to the MB game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop at the active line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops at the active line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called “MB inside”.
In the ninth embodiment, since the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to “PB = 1”, if the player wins the MB, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB always stops at the active line in the current game. , MB.

The condition device (role) according to the ninth embodiment is roughly divided into a special role (role), a replay (replay), and a small role.
Furthermore, the special role has three types of BB, RB, and MB, the replay has two types of replay 1 and replay 2, and the small role is a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell. , Right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2.
Note that the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell are collectively referred to as a “push order bell”.
Further, the “condition device” operates in accordance with the winning number determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more condition devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and a winning flag corresponding to the activated condition device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26C, in the ninth embodiment, one of the winning numbers from “0” to “16” is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the winning number corresponds to the determined winning number. Any of the condition devices from the non-winning to the MB is activated.
Each of the two types of replays wins independently and does not win over other condition devices (roles).
In addition, there are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell, all of which are won independently and do not overlap with other roles.

Furthermore, there are a case where the watermelon is won alone and a case where the watermelon overlaps with the BB.
Further, the cherry 1 has a case of winning alone and a case of overlapping winning with the BB, and the cherry 2 has a case of winning alone, a case of overlapping winning with RB, and a case of overlapping winning with BB. .
In addition, BB has a case where it wins alone and a case where it overlaps with watermelon, cherry 1 or cherry 2, but the RB does not win alone, it only overlaps with cherry 2 and MB. Will win only, and will not win with other roles.

The “payout” means the number of medals paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each condition device is stopped (the winning combination).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell, the payout is different between the specified number 3 (game state other than MB) and the specified number 1 (MB), but otherwise, The payout is the same for the prescribed number 3 and the prescribed number 1.

In addition, the left correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the left first stop is in the correct answer order and the other than the left first stop is an incorrect push order. In the prescribed number 3, eight medals are paid out in the correct answer order. Then, one medal is paid out in the incorrect answering order, and in the case of the specified number 1, 14 medals are paid out in the correct answering order, and 15 medals are paid out in the incorrect answering order.
Similarly, the middle correct bell is a push order bell in which the first stop in the middle is in the correct answer order, and the other than the first stop is an incorrect push order, and the right correct bell is in the right first stop in the correct push order. , The push order bell which is the wrong answer push order except the right first stop.
The common bell is a bell for paying out eight medals in any order.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The role lottery means 61 performs lottery of a winning number. When the winning number is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Also, the lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26C, in the ninth embodiment, any one of the winning numbers “0” to “15” is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61. The winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to the condition devices of "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. When the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.

For example, when the winning number “1” is determined, the condition device of “Replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1” operates. When the winning number "8" is determined, the conditioner of "watermelon + BB" corresponding to the winning number "8" is operated.
As described in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 is based on random number generation means, random number extraction means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and random number values extracted by the random number extraction means. A winning number determining means for determining a winning number; when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is operated.
For example, the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means is the same between the non-internal and internal states, and the condition device that operates is sometimes the same, and even if the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means is the same, The condition device used may be different.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. The winning flag control means 62 controls ON / OFF of a winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on a winning result of a winning number by the winning lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the role included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). .

For example, in the non-RT, when the winning number “1” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the winning flag of “Replay 1” included in the condition device of “Replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1” is set. It turns on, and the other winning flags turn off.
Similarly, in the non-RT, when the winning number “10” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, “Cherry 1” and “BB” included in the condition device of “Cherry 1 + BB” corresponding to the winning number “10” Are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, since the winning information of the role other than the special role (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if the role which does not carry the winning information in the game this time is won and the winning flag of the role is turned on, the role is not carried out. Regardless of whether or not the game has won, at the end of the current game, the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning information of the special role (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, when the special role is won in the game this time, and when the winning flag of the special role is once turned on, the special role is not performed. The winning flag is kept on until a prize is won, and when the special role is won, the winning flag is turned off.

  For example, in the non-RT, when the winning number “10” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, “Cherry 1” and “BB” included in the condition device of “Cherry 1 + BB” corresponding to the winning number “10” Are turned on, but if "BB" does not win in this game, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" has won in this game, "Cherry 1" will be displayed at the end of this game. The winning flag of “1” is turned off, and the winning flag of “BB” is kept on. In this case, the process moves from the next game to inside the BB.

Further, for example, when the winning number “9” is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61 inside the BB, the “Cherry” corresponding to the winning number “9” is added to the winning flag of “BB” carried over. The winning flag of “Cherry 1” included in the condition device of “1” is turned on. That is, the two winning flags “Cherry 1” and “BB” are turned on.
For this reason, in the non-RT, when the winning number “10” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 (overlap winning for “Cherry 1 + BB”), and within the BB, the winning number “9” is obtained by the lottery by the role lottery means 61. "(The single winning of" Cherry 1 ") is the same as the ON / OFF state of the winning flag.

Also, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning flags of all the small combinations (seven of common bell, left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). turn on. For this reason, although it is not the one that has been won by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the state is the same as that of winning all the small wins.
For example, during the MB game, when the winning number “0” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the “non-winning” corresponding to the winning number “0” does not include any of the roles. The winning flag of the small win (the above seven small wins) is turned on.
For example, during the MB game, when the winning lottery means 61 determines the winning number “1” in the lottery, the “replay 1” included in the condition device of the “replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1”. In addition to the winning flags, the winning flags of all the small wins (the above seven small wins) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the reel control means 65, and the reel control means 65 includes a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to ON / OFF of the winning flag. Is provided. Further, each stop position determination table defines a stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
When the winning number is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the on / off control of the winning flag of the role included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is performed by the winning flag control means 62, the reel control means 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to ON / OFF of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. It is determined and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.
Further, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of replay 1 is on and the winning flags other than replay 1 are off is such that the symbol combination corresponding to replay 1 stops on the active line, and The stop position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than Replay 1 does not stop on the activated line.

  Furthermore, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct answer bell are off indicates that the stop switch 42 is operated in the first left stop. When the symbol combination for paying out eight medals stops on the active line and the stop switch 42 is operated in a mode other than the first left stop, the symbol combination for paying out one medal stops on the active line. Thus, the stop position of each reel 31 is determined.

In addition, the column of “number of internal lotteries” in FIG. 26 (c) indicates the number of each winning number in each game state. When the number of internal lotteries is divided by “65536”, the winning probability is obtained.
For example, since the number of the winning number “4” in the non-RT is “3000”, the winning number “4” is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT, and the “left” corresponding to the winning number “4” is determined. The probability that the condition device of the “correct answer bell” will operate is “3000/65536”.

In addition, in the column of “internal drawing number” in FIG. 26C, “*” mark indicates that the advantageous section drawing can be executed.
Here, the "advantageous section" means a game section having performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated).
The “instruction function” means a function of displaying (notifying) the “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
Further, the "operation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won.

Further, “advantageous section drawing” means a lottery that determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous section.
Then, when the player wins in the advantageous section drawing and shifts to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and it is possible to notify the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won.
For example, the number “8000” of the winning number “3” (“common bell”) in non-RT is marked with “*”, which means that in non-RT, the winning lottery means 61 (internal drawing means 61) Is determined to be the winning number “3” (“common bell”) by lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in non-RT, when the winning number is determined to be “0” (non-winning), and when the winning numbers “4” to “6” (“left correct bell”, “ When it is determined to be "medium correct bell" or "right correct bell"), the advantageous section extraction is not executed, but otherwise, the advantageous section extraction can be executed.
Further, in the RT, RB, and BB, when the winning number is determined to be “4” to “6” (“left correct bell”, “middle correct bell”, or “right correct bell”). Except for the non-RT, when the number is determined to be the same as the winning number, the advantageous section extraction can be executed.

Since the winning information of the BB is carried over inside the BB, the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined during the BB and the non-RT (non-internal) When the winning number is determined to be “10” (overlap winning of “Cherry 1 + BB”), the on / off state of the winning flag is the same.
Furthermore, the number of the winning number “10” (non-internal), the number of winning numbers “10” (duplicate winning of “Cherry 1 + BB”), and the number of the winning number “9” (independent winning of “Cherry 1”) inside the BB Is set to the same “200”.
Therefore, when the winning number “9” (independent winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined inside the BB, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.

If the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined in the RB, the winning flag of “Cherry 1” and the winning flag of “RB” being carried over are turned on. .
Further, "BB" and "RB" coincide in that they are both special roles (gears), and the winning number "10" (duplicate winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) is used. The entry number and the entry number of the winning number “9” (independent winning of “Cherry 1”) in the RB are set to the same “200”.
For this reason, even when the winning number “9” (independent winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined in the RB, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number is determined to be the winning number “12” (duplicate winning of “Cherry 2 + RB”) or the winning number “13” (duplicate winning of “Cherry 2 + BB”) in the non-RT, the winning is made inside the RB or inside the BB. The case where the number is determined to be “11” (“Cherry 2” alone winning) coincides in that the winning flag of “Cherry 2” and the winning flag of the special combination (gear) are turned on.
Furthermore, when the numbers of the winning number “12” (duplicate winning of “Cherry 2 + RB”) and the winning number “13” (duplicate winning of “Cherry 2 + BB”) in the non-RT are added up, the total number becomes “300”, which is inside the RB and BB. This matches the number "300" of the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") in the inside.
Therefore, even when the winning number “11” (single winning of “Cherry 2”) is determined in the inside of the RB and the inside of the BB, the advantageous section extraction can be executed.

The column of “number of advantageous section lots” in FIG. 26C shows the number of each winning number. Dividing the number of advantageous sections drawn by “16384” gives the winning probability.
For example, in a non-RT, RB or BB, when the lottery by the lottery means 61 determines the winning number “1” (single “Replay 1”), the probability of winning in the advantageous section drawing is as follows. "20/16384".
Further, for example, in non-RT or RT, when the lottery by the lottery means 61 determines the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon + BB”), the probability of winning in the advantageous section drawing is “10000/16384”. ".

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to “PB = 1”.
Also, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the lottery of the MB is performed in the non-RT and the RT, but when the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB always stops at the active line in the current game. The game is shifted from the next game to the MB game without being in the inside.
Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), during the MB game, the lottery of Replay 1 or Replay 2 is performed, and regardless of the lottery result by the role lottery means 61, all the small wins are repeatedly won. Become.

For this reason, when the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of “Replay 1” and all small roles (common bell, left correct bell, middle The winning flag of the correct answer bell, right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) is turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number “2” (single winning of “Replay 2”) is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of “Replay 2” and the winning flags of all small wins are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all the small roles are turned on Means that the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is ON is selected. However, during the MB game, the prescribed number is 1 (one coin is inserted), the payout is different from non-RT, etc., and 14 or 15 coins are paid out.
With this, when the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined during the MB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the first left stop (when the push order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination for paying out the medals is stopped at the activated line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the first left stop (when the push order is incorrect), the symbol combination for paying out 15 medals is changed. Stop at the active line.

Similarly, when the winning number “2” (single winning of “Replay 2”) is determined during the MB game, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the right correct answer bell is ON is selected, and At the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is correct), 14 cards are paid out, and when other than the right first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), 15 cards are paid out.
Then, in the first game during the MB game, a push order in which 14 cards are paid out is reported, and in the second game in the MB game, a push order in which 15 cards are paid out is reported.
As described above, the MB game end condition is set so that the payout number of medals exceeds 14, and by performing such notification, 29 medals are paid out during the MB game. You can do so. In addition, since the specified number is set to “1” during the MB game, the player can acquire 27 medals obtained by subtracting the inserted number “2” from the payout number “29”.

In addition, in order to notify the player of the pushing order during the MB game, the transition to the advantageous section is required.
For this reason, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the non-RT or RT, the winning of the advantageous section lottery when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is determined to the winning number “15” (the single winning of “MB”). The probability is set to “16384/16384”, that is, “100%”.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the effect group number selecting means 64. The effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number and transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26 (c), the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Specifically, the effect group numbers "0" to "3" are determined corresponding to the winning numbers "0" to "3", and the effect group numbers "4" to "6" corresponding to the winning numbers "4" to "6". And the effect group numbers "5" to "13" are determined corresponding to the winning numbers "7" to "15".
When the winning number is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

  Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the pressing order instruction number selecting means 63. The pushing order instruction number selecting means 63 is a winning number determined when a winning number corresponding to the pushing order bell (left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell) is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61. Is used to select a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to a correct pressing order) corresponding to.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the control command transmitting unit 71. The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) output to the sub-control board 80 and required for the effect.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits, as control commands, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (during AT, when the correct answer is pressed). Only when the winning number corresponding to the condition device having the order is determined), the effect group number, the information when the stop switch 42 is operated, the information on the winning combination, and the like, and the gaming state (non-RT, RT) , RB inside, BB inside, RB inside, BB inside, MB inside), the effect group number and the like are transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Accordingly, the sub control board 80 determines the game state on the main control board 50 side and the condition devices (excluding the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell) that are operated by the role lottery means 61. be able to.
On the side of the sub-control board 80, it can be determined from the effect group number that one of the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell has been won, but the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, or the right correct bell. It is not possible to judge which of them has been won (the order of correct answers).
Also, during the AT, the correct push order can be notified by the push order instruction number.

The sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of the effect during the game and during the game standby.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (the control command transmitting means 71) unidirectionally transmits the information ( Control command).
The sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like, like the main control board 50.
The effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control unit 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect determination table and the like.
Further, the effect determination table defines the effect to be output, and a plurality of effect output control means 91 determine the effect to be output using any one of the effect determination tables, and determine the determined effect. Is output.
That is, the effect output control means 91 determines what effect is to be output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and any of the effect determination tables. , The output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an effect determination table commonly used for non-RT (in non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and FIG. 28 is an effect determination table commonly used in RB and BB. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, 18 types of effect patterns from “no effect” to “continuous effect” are provided. In addition, each production pattern from “character production (buzzing)” to “continuous production” defines productions with different contents.
For example, the “confirmed effect” is an effect whose content allows the player to know that the special role has been won. The “notification effect after the first stop” is the effect after the first stop (after the first stop switch 42 is operated). This is an effect that is output at the timing, “Left first stop effect” is an effect of content instructing that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first, and “Continuous effect” is continuous for a plurality of games. This is the effect that is output.

The column of “number of effect pattern allocations” in FIG. 27 indicates the number of allocations of each effect pattern when each effect group number is received. Dividing the number of effect pattern allocations by "256" gives the selection probability of each effect pattern. In FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is described below each effect group number.
For example, in the non-RT, the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number “1” (single win of “Replay 1”), and the selection probability of “no effect” when the effect group number “1” is transmitted is “128/256”, the selection probability of “character production (buzzing)” is “20/256”, the selection probability of “conversation production (buzzing)” is also “20/256”, and “cut-in production”. (Strong effect) ”is“ 0/256 ”.

As described above, the control command transmitting unit 71 sends information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB, BB, MB) to the sub-control board 80. Send the production group number.
Then, the effect output control means 91 of the sub-control board 80 selects an effect determination table corresponding to the game state based on the information indicating the game state received from the main control substrate 50, and selects the selected effect determination table and the main Based on the effect group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which effect of the effect is to be output, and the outputs of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are controlled in accordance with the determination.

  Here, in the non-RT (during non-internal), if the winning number “14” (single winning of “BB”) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 and the effect group number “12” is transmitted, the effect output is performed. The control means 91 selects the effect determination table used in common for non-RT and RT (non-AT) shown in FIG. 27, and places the effect group number “12” (single win of “BB”) in the effect determination table. Using the numbers, it is determined which of the effect patterns is to be output. As shown in FIG. 27, when “BB” alone is won in non-RT, “continuous effect” is selected with a probability of “40/256”, for example.

On the other hand, in the BB, when the winning number “0” (“non-winning”) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 and the effect group number “0” is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 An effect determination table used commonly in the RB and BB shown in FIG. 28 is selected, and any of the effects is determined using the number of the effect group number “0” (“non-winning”) in the effect determination table. Determines whether to output the effect of the pattern. As shown in FIG. 28, at the time of “non-winning” in the BB, for example, “determined effect” is selected with a probability of “80/256”.
In this way, the effect output control means 91 becomes a game which has been independently won as “BB” by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT (during non-internal), and has become “non-winned” in the role lottery means 61 during the inside of the BB. The effect to be output is determined using different effect determination tables for the game. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.

  In the case of non-RT, when the winning number “14” (single win of “BB”) is determined by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning number “14”. The winning flag of “BB” included in the condition device of “BB” corresponding to “” is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of “BB” is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a “BB-only stop position determination table”.

The “BB independent stop position determination table” is used to stop each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line, and the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than BB does not stop on the active line. Determine the position.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 sets the stop switch 42 based on the “BB independent stop position determination table” and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

If the winning number “0” (“non-winning”) is obtained by the lottery by the lottery means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 carries over the “BB” carried over. Are kept on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of “BB” is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same “BB independent stop position determination table” as when the “BB” is solely won by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT is selected.
For this reason, when the combination lottery means 61 becomes "non-winning" in the inside of BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 as when the single lottery means 61 is won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT is performed. Further, "the stop control of the same reel 31 is performed" means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same mode (the pressing order and the operation timing), each reel 31 stops at the same position and This means that a stop roll is displayed.

In this manner, the main control board 50 side has the same condition when the winning lottery means 61 alone wins in the non-RT and the winning lottery means 61 becomes "non-winning" inside the BB. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the stop position determination table described above, but the sub-control board 80 determines an effect to be output using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub-control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
Also, even if the same reel 31 is stopped and controlled on the main control board 50 side, and the same stop number is displayed, different effects are output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the special role is won. (Inside) can be guessed to the player.

Furthermore, by selecting a different effect determination table on the sub-control board 80 side when the non-RT “BB” alone is won and when “non-winning” inside the BB, the “BB” alone during the non-RT is selected. At the time of winning, an effect determination table having a low selection probability of a definitive effect (an effect that the player can know that the player has won the BB) is selected. A decision table can be selected.
This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the player has won the “BB” in the game that has won the “BB”, and that the player has won the “BB” inside the BB. By making it easy for the player to understand, it is possible for the player to aim for the prize of "BB", to prevent the inside of the BB from continuing forever, and not to be disadvantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the non-RT, when the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon + BB”) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 and the effect group number “6” is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 An effect determination table commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal) shown in FIG. 27 is selected, and the effect group number “6” (“watermelon + BB”) in this effect determination table is repeatedly won. ) Is used to determine which effect pattern effect to output. As shown in FIG. 27, at the time of “watermelon + BB” overlapping winning in a non-RT, for example, with a probability of “50/256”, “character production (buzzing)”, “conversation production (buzzing)”, or “cut-in production ( "Strong production)" and "continuous production" with a probability of "30/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, if the winning number “7” is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 (single “watermelon” win) and the effect group number “5” is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 Selects an effect determination table commonly used in the RB and BB shown in FIG. 28, and uses the numbers in the column of the effect group number “5” (single winning of “watermelon”) in the effect determination table. , Which of the effect patterns is to be output. As shown in FIG. 28, when “watermelon” in the BB alone is won, for example, “character production (lively)” or “conversation production (lively)” is selected with a probability of “73/256”, and “20” is selected. / 256 ”with the probability of“ / 256 ”.
In this way, the effect output control means 91 is a non-RT (non-internal) game in which the role lottery means 61 repeatedly wins “watermelon + BB” and the role lottery means 61 wins “watermelon” alone in the BB. The effect to be output is determined by using a different effect determination table for the game. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.

In addition, during non-internal, the continuous production at the time of "watermelon + BB" duplicate winning is shown by showing the player a continuous performance over a plurality of games to keep the player's expectation of "BB" winning long. The probability is set high.
On the other hand, during the BB inside, if the player shows a continuous performance over a plurality of games, the "BB" winning will be delayed and the medal of the player will decrease accordingly, so "Watermelon" alone wins The selection probability of the continuous effect at the time is set low, and the selection probability of the fixed effect at the time of "non-winning" is set high in order to prompt the player to win the "BB" prize.
Note that, within the BB, the winning probability of each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning may be set so that the medal of the player does not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous effect may be set high.

  In the non-RT (during non-internal), when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon + BB”), on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 Then, the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” included in the condition device of “watermelon + BB” corresponding to the winning number “8” are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as “watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table”.

The “watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table” is set so that the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon or BB can be stopped at the activated line, and the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than watermelon and BB does not stop at the activated line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop switch based on the “watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table” and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. A stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  Further, when the winning number “7” (single “watermelon” win) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 carries over the main control board 50. While keeping the winning flag of “BB” on, the winning flag of “watermelon” included in the condition device of “watermelon” corresponding to the winning number “7” is turned on, and “watermelon” and “BB” are turned on. Are turned off. Thereby, the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” are turned on. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” are on and the other winning flags are off. In other words, the same “watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table” as when the “watermelon + BB” is repeatedly won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.

For this reason, when "watermelon" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 inside the BB, the same reel 31 stop control as when "watermelon + BB" is repeatedly won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT is performed. .
In this way, the main control board 50 side determines whether “watermelon + BB” is won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT and when “watermelon” is independently won by the role lottery means 61 inside the BB. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table, but the sub-control board 80 determines an effect to be output using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.

  In addition, when "Cherry 1 + BB" is non-RT and non-RT and "Cherry 1" is independently elected, non-RT "watermelon + BB" and non-RT are also elected. In the same manner as when "watermelon" is won alone, the main control board 50 determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control board 80 uses a different effect determination table. Use to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.

Furthermore, when "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" is non-RT and non-RT and "Cherry 2" alone is selected inside the BB or RB, non-RT "watermelon + BB" The main control board 50 determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, as in the case of the double win and the single win of “watermelon” inside the BB. On the substrate 80 side, the effect to be output is determined using different effect determination tables. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub-control board 80 side, so that the effects can be diversified.

As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the number of arrangements of each effect pattern is the same between when “watermelon” is independently won in non-RT and when “watermelon” is independently won inside the BB. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are the same.
However, when a single "watermelon" is won by non-RT, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the winning flag of "watermelon" is on and the other winning flags are off. When “watermelon” alone is won inside the BB, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” are on and the other winning flags are off. I do. For this reason, the stop control of the reel 31 is different between the case where “watermelon” is solely won in non-RT and the case where “watermelon” is solely won in the BB.
As described above, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same on the sub-control board 80 side when “watermelon” alone is won in non-RT and when “watermelon” alone is won inside the BB. On the main control board 50 side, the stop control of the reel 31 is different.

  As described above, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means of the role lottery means 61 is the same, and the winning number determined by the winning number determining means of the role lottery means 61 is the same. When the same condition device is activated, the stop control of the reels 31 for each game state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (the selected effect determination table). ) May be different.

  In a plurality of gaming states, random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the role lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the role lottery means 61 are the same, and the same condition is applied. When the device operates, the stop control of the reels 31 for each gaming state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (the selected effect determination table) is different. .

  Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the role lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the role lottery means 61 are different, and the same condition device is used. Is activated, the stop control of the reels 31 for each game state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probabilities of the respective effect patterns (selected effect determination tables) are different.

<Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) Type of combination, type of condition device, type of game state, prescribed number in each game state, payout at the time of winning each combination, allocation of internal drawing number, advantageous section drawing shown in the ninth embodiment The allocation of the numbers, the types of the effect patterns, the allocation of the number of arrangements of each effect pattern, etc. are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to the game content.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table of the internal lottery and the advantageous section lottery in the setting 1 is shown. A draw table for the draw and the advantageous section draw can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the game state and the effect group number to the sub-control board 80. Thus, the sub control board 80 determines the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects an effect pattern with a probability according to the game state and the condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit the winning number determined by the internal drawing to the sub-control board 80, and may transmit information indicating the condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by the internal drawing. Is also good. Then, the sub control board 80 may determine the condition device on the main control board 50 based on the received winning number and the information indicating the condition device.

Further, for example, the control command transmitting unit 71 transmits information indicating the condition device determined by the internal drawing and information of the winning combination to the sub-control board 80. The sub control board 80 may determine the game state of the main control board 50 based on the information indicating the condition device and the information of the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, the sub control board 80 receives information indicating that “BB” has been won, but if it does not receive information indicating that “BB” has won, the game state of the main control board 50 will be changed. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the information indicating the effect group number, the winning number and the condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side An effect pattern may be selected.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating on / off of a winning flag corresponding to each combination and information of a winning combination to the sub-control board 80. Then, on the sub control board 80 side, the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating on / off of the winning flag and the information of the winning combination.
For example, if the information indicating that the winning flag of “BB” is ON is received, but the information indicating that “BB” has won is not received, the gaming state of the main control board 50 is in BB inside. Can be determined.

In addition, since the lottery of “BB” is not performed during the inside of the BB, when information indicating that only the winning flag of “BB” is ON is received during the inside of the BB, the internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is performed. Can be determined as the winning number “0” (“non-winning”).
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side also determined on the sub control board 80 side, the effect pattern on the sub control board 80 side May be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, “single winning” means that only the role other than the special role is won, and the special role is not won at the same time. , Meaning that a special role and another role other than the special role are simultaneously elected.
For example, the election of “watermelon + controller 1” in the BB is a double election in the sense that multiple types of elections are elected at the same time. At the same time, no win has been made, so in the sense of the ninth embodiment, a single win is made.

In addition, when the “watermelon + controller 1 + BB” in the non-inside is won (duplicate win) and when the “watermelon + controller 1” in the BB is won (independent win), the main control board 50 side Since the on / off state of the winning flag is the same, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table. However, since the winning number and the effect group number are different, on the sub control board 80 side, The effect to be output is determined using different effect determination tables.
The "control hand" is a hand for making the stop position determination table to be selected different by making the on / off state of the winning flag different, thereby making the stop control of the reel 31 different, and winning. It is not a role for.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number “11” (single winning of “Cherry 2”) is determined in the inside of the RB and the inside of the BB, the advantageous section drawing can be executed. The advantage section extraction may not be executed when a winning combination overlapping with the special combination is won.
(7) The various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments and the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Tenth embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to control of display of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 sets a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), a setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on (for example, power-on, first interrupt processing activation, program activation, etc.). In the setting confirmation mode, the setting is being confirmed, and in the RWM abnormality error state, control is performed so that all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
As described in the second embodiment, since the management information display LED 74 is formed of a four-digit LED, “8888” is displayed when all the LEDs are turned on. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the LED of the management information display LED 74 has a defect.

If the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to a setting change state in which the set value can be changed. Further, when the state shifts to the setting change state, all the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on.
Then, 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to a time longer than the time required from the power-on to the transition to the setting change state when the setting key switch is on at the time of the power-on. I have.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the lighting period of all the management information display LEDs 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required from the power-on to the transition to the setting change state. In this case, first, all the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on, then the management information is temporarily displayed on the management information display LEDs 74, and then all the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that the manager (store clerk in the hall) may suspect that the gaming machine has some problem.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the management information display LEDs 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
The lighting period of all the management information display LEDs 74 from the predetermined timing based on the power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, but may be any time longer than the time required from the power-on to the transition to the setting change state. May be set.

Hereinafter, the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be described.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are referred to as “digit 6”, “digit 7”, “digit 8”, and “digit 9” in order from the left.
Further, among the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74, the left two LEDs (digits 6 and 7) are referred to as “identification segments”, and the two right LEDs (digits 8 and 9) are referred to as “ratio”. Seg ".

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of identification segment. Digit 7: Lower digit of identification segment. Digit 8: Upper digit of ratio segment. Digit 9: Lower digit of ratio segment.
Further, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED including segments A to G and segment DP.

The display of the test pattern of the management information display LED 74 is performed to confirm whether all the segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly turned on and off. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all the segments are set to have the light-on state and the light-off state.
When displaying a test pattern on the management information display LED 74, the test pattern is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on turning on the power (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) During setting change (mode) (4) During setting check (mode) (5) During RWM error error

As a test pattern, first, a predetermined display is switched every one second and displayed for five seconds. Note that the time for maintaining one display is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (other than 5 seconds).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs have a light-on state and a light-off state during 5 seconds, which is the display time of the test pattern.
Second, as a test pattern, all segments of all LEDs are made to blink. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one blink (lighting and turning off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a first example of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In the test pattern display of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, the lit segments are indicated by solid lines, and the unlit segments are indicated by dotted lines. In the segment DP, the lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and the light-off response is indicated by a white circle.
In the following description, “.” Indicates that the segment DP is in a lighting state, and “.” Indicates that the segment DP is in a non-lighting state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display of each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern displaying “0.”. More specifically, this is a pattern in which the segments A to F and DP are on and the segment G is off.
The other is a pattern for displaying “−.”. More specifically, the pattern is such that the segment G is turned on and the segments A to F and DP are turned off.
Therefore, “0.” and “−.” Have the opposite relationship between the lit and unlit segments, respectively.

In the state shown in FIG. 29A, “0.” is displayed in the upper digit of the identification segment and the upper digit of the ratio segment, and “−.” Is displayed in the lower digit of the identification segment and the lower digit of the ratio segment.
Further, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29A is maintained for one second. In addition, counting for one second may be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of FIG. 29A is started, “447 (D)” is set in the counter, and “1” is subtracted by each interruption processing. Ending the display of a). Thus, the display of FIG. 29A can be maintained for “2.235 × 447 = 999.045 ms”.

When the display for about one second in FIG. 29A is completed, the display shifts to the display in FIG. 29B.
The display of FIG. 29B is obtained by replacing the display of FIG. 29A with the LED displaying “0.” and the LED displaying “−.”. That is, in the display of FIG. 29 (b), in contrast to the display of FIG. 29 (a), “−.” Is displayed in the upper digit of the identification segment and the upper digit of the ratio segment, and the lower digit of the identification segment and the lower digit of the ratio segment are displayed. Indicates "0."
Further, similarly to the case of FIG. 29A, the display state shown in FIG. 29B is continued for one second (447 interruption).

The display contents of FIGS. 29A and 29B are switched and displayed every one second, and are executed for five seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display content as (a), and (d) has the same display content as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (5 seconds) is completed, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “7.U.5.0.”. In addition, the accessory ratio may be displayed instead of the advantageous section ratio.

As described above, when “0.” and “−.” Are displayed on the LED, a lighting state and a light-off state can be created for all the segments (A to G and DP). Cannot be turned off or cannot be turned off).
When displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as “0.−.” Or “−.0.”. Therefore, there is no possibility that the test pattern is confused with the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a second example of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display content was changed every second, and the test pattern was displayed for five seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on turning on the power or within 5 seconds from the setting change start processing.
On the other hand, Example 2 of the test pattern display shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying a test pattern until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as during a setting change, during a setting check, or during an RWM error. .
Of course, the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used when displaying until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Similarly, it goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used in a case where the test pattern display is performed within a predetermined period after the start condition of the test pattern display is satisfied.

In Example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." Is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned on, and "*" is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *. *. *. "(" * "Indicates that the segments A to G are off). In other words, this is a pattern in which “8.8.8.8.” Blinks.
In the example 2 of FIG. 30, the lighting state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30A is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the lighting state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30B is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Then, the lighting state shown in FIG. 30A and the light-off state shown in FIG.

  In the tenth embodiment, the blink interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, "134 (D)" is set as the initial value of the timer, and the timer value is decremented by "1" at every 2.235 ms interrupt processing. When the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or It is determined that the light-off time has elapsed. Thus, by counting the number of interrupts “134”, “299.49” ms can be counted.

In the test pattern display example 2 of FIG. 30 as well, the lighting state and the light-off state can be created for all the segments by “8.” and “*.”. Therefore, a segment defect (cannot be turned on or cannot be turned off) can be easily determined visually.
Further, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as “8.8.”. For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display blinks regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." Is displayed and the segment DP does not light. On the other hand, in the display of "8.8.", Since the segment DP is also lit, the two are not confused.

  Each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has been completed). Then, the updated ratio is displayed in the subsequent interrupt processing. Here, when a power failure occurs immediately before the update of the ratio and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is restored, the update (calculation) process of the ratio is performed for 5 seconds while the test pattern is displayed. Execute Then, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is started, the ratio updated after the return from the power-off is displayed.

<Eleventh embodiment>
FIG. 31A is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31B is a diagram showing management information display LEDs 74 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 17C is a diagram showing the set value display LED 73 in the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31A, the credit display LED 76 includes a digit 1a (upper digit) and a digit 2a (lower digit). The acquired number display LED 78 is composed of a digit 3a (upper digit) and a digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and in particular, in the present embodiment, is constituted by a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment).
Each of these digits 1a to 4a is a 7 segment display having a dot segment (segment P). In particular, the segment P of the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

Digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as status display LED 79. Although FIG. 1 shows the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78, the state display LED 79 is not shown. However, in actuality, as shown in FIG. 31A, a credit number display LED 76, an acquisition number display LED 78, and a state display LED 79 are mounted on the display substrate 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only one bet display LED 79a is lit. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are turned on. When three medals are bet, all of the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c light up.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 can be operated. Therefore, it does not light in a state in which a medal has not been bet (or automatic replay has not been inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights when a medal can be inserted. That is, it lights up before the game is completed and medals for shifting to the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Even when the replay is activated, the light is turned on when betting is possible according to the number of credits. When the number of bets is the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that is turned on when a replay win is achieved. When an automatic bet based on the replay win is made, the replay display LED 79f is turned on to notify the player that the player is in an automatic bet state.
As the status display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31 (A), for example, a payment display LED (LED lit during the payment processing) is shown, but is not shown in FIG. 31 (A).

In FIG. 31B, the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29 and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b to 4b are 7-segment displays provided with dot segments (segments P), like the above-mentioned digits 1a to 4a. Digits 1b to 4b display information type upper, information type lower, numerical upper, and numerical lower, respectively.
The segment P of the digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit division display LED. The digit division display LED is used to clarify the division between the information type and the numerical value.

The segments P of the digits 1b to 4b can be turned on when a test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS.
Further, in FIG. 31 (C), the set value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. ) Digit 5b.
Also, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b and the segments A to G and P in the present embodiment.
The 7-segment digit is a 7-segment composed of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment P. Note that an LED including the segments A to G without the segment P may be referred to as “7 seg”, and an LED including eight segments including the segment P may be referred to as “8 seg”. In the book, it is referred to as "7-segment" including the LED composed of eight segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, of the digit 1a, the segments A to G constitute the upper 7-segment of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment P is unused. Similarly, each of the segments A to G of the digits 2a and 3a constitutes the 7-segment of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.
The segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute the lower seven digits of the acquired number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.

  The digit 5a is an LED constituting the status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to 1-bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to 2-bet display LED 79b,..., Segment F corresponds to replay display LED 79f. Also, the segments G and P of the digit 5a are not provided.

  Digits 1b to 4b constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display information types of the management information. The segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in the segments 1b and 2b in the management information. The segments P of the digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally turned off, but turned on when the test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS. The segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit-separating display LED for clarifying the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value and facilitating confirmation. During the display of the test pattern described above, the digit-separated display LED may be repeatedly turned on and off as in the case of the segment P of other digits, or may be lit all the time.

  In the digit 5b, the segments A to G compose the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73, and the segment P is an LED that is lit during the setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 73, when the segment P is turned off, it indicates that the setting is being checked, and when the segment P is turned on, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that is lit when the set value is determined during the setting change.

FIG. 32 shows the configuration of segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data. The D0 bit corresponds to the segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to the segment B,..., The D7 bits correspond to the segment P.
For example, when "0" is displayed on the digit 1a, the segments A to F are turned on, and the segments G and P are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111 (B)".

When "1" is displayed on the digit 4a and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the segments B, C, and P are turned on.
Furthermore, before the game is started, three medals are bet, and when the game can be started, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are turned on. The segment data of 5a is “000011111 (B)”.

FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating the output port 52 according to the eleventh embodiment. Note that the type of the output port is not limited to that shown in FIG.
As the output port 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port for transmitting a digit signal (output port 2) and two output ports for transmitting a segment signal (output ports 3 and 4) are provided. .
The output port 3 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
The output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73.

  Digits 1 to 5 are assigned to the output port 2 for bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from the D0 bit of the output port 2, both the digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and the digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (upper information type)) A drive signal is provided.

In output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are not used.
The output port 3 is an output port for the segment A to P signals of the digits 1a to 5a, and the segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Similarly, the output port 4 is an output port for the segment A to P signals of the digits 1b to 5b, and the segment A to P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits, respectively.
Further, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal.

  Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external centralized terminal board 100. More specifically, for example, an advantageous section, an AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is in operation, an external signal 4 indicating that an error occurred in the slot machine 10 or that a power cut has occurred, or the like. , An external signal 5 indicating that the front door of the slot machine 10 is open.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving the data strobe signal, the sub-control board 80 controls the sub-control data signal to be acquired from a buffer provided on the sub-control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
In addition, output ports (not shown) other than the output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. , A sub-control data signal, a test signal, and the like.

FIG. 34A is a diagram illustrating a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In the present embodiment, as the processing of the main control board 50, a main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41 described later) performed for each game, and an interrupt processing (every 2.235 ms) once in parallel with the main processing. I_INTR) (FIG. 53 described later) is executed.

  The LED display counter is 1-byte data, and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which one of the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) to light. As for each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to a digit 1 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to a digit 2 signal,..., The D4 bit is assigned to a digit 5 signal. Then, in one interruption process, the dynamic lighting of the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to “1” in the LED display counter is turned on.

  The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of “00010000 (B)” as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter updates the bit “1” of the LED display counter value by one digit to the right as the interrupt progresses from “1” → “2” →. In FIG. 34, at the interrupt following the interrupt “5”, the LED display counter becomes “00000000 (B)” by one digit right shift. At the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized. The LED display counter is set to "00010000 (B)". Thereby, the LED display counter repeats the value of “5” → “4” →... → “1” → “5” → “4” →... That is, one cycle is generated by five interrupts.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N + 1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N + 2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N + 3" interrupt: 000000010 (B)
“N + 4” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
“N + 5” interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as “N” interrupt)
"N + 6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
It becomes.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b are turned on with one cycle of five interrupts. Specifically, in FIG. 34 (A), for example, when an interrupt is “1”, that is, when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, a digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, the digits 5a and 5b can be turned on. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt “2”, the LED display counter becomes “00001000 (B)”, a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED D78 and the lower digit of the management information display LED 74 can be turned on. .

FIG. 34B shows the data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted. As shown in FIG. 34 (B), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data corresponding to the digit 1 signal in the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal in the D1 bit,..., The D4 bit in the D5 bit. is there. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of the output port 2.
As shown in FIG. 34B, digits 1 to 5 can be turned on during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be turned on during setting change, and digits 1 to 5 can be turned on during setting confirmation. is there. In addition. “Normal” refers to waiting for a game and during a game.

In the interrupt processing, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the bit set to “1” becomes the digit to be turned on in the current interrupt processing.
For example, if the LED display counter is “00010000 (B)” and the LED display request flag is “00011111 (B) (normal)”, AND operation of both results in “00010000 (B)”, and digit 5 Only the signal becomes “1”. However, during a normal operation (playing a game or during a game), a segment signal is output from the output port 3 so that the status display LED 79 can be turned on. However, the segment signal is not output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 is output. (Digit 5b) is controlled not to light up.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at an interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is “00010000 (B)”), a segment signal is output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is turned on. It can be turned on.
During the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is “00000100 (B)” or “00001000 (B)”), the digit 3 signal (the acquired number display LED 78 An upper digit and a digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output, and the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88" (contents indicating that the setting is being changed).

  Furthermore, when the LED display counter generates the segment signal of the output port 3 at the interrupt timing of “00001000 (B)” (interrupt “2” in FIG. 34), the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. It is done by doing. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, a value obtained by performing an OR operation on the generated segment signal and “10000000 (B)” is output from the output port 3 as a segment signal. Thus, the segment P (the advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be turned on.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, byte counts, names and contents of data stored in the RWM 53.
The data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in the description of the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address “F000 (H)” is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is “N”, “N−1” is stored as the set value data. In the present embodiment, there are set values “1” to “6”. Therefore, any value of “0 (H)” to “5 (H)” is stored as the set value data.
The set value display LED 73 displays “N” obtained by adding “1” to the set value data as the set value.

The address “F010 (H)” is a storage area for the credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In the present embodiment, any value of “0” to “50 (D)” is stored as the credit amount data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting the credit number into a decimal number is stored as the credit number data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is “29”, the value “29 (H)” is stored. In other words, “00101001 (B)” is stored in the address “F010 (H)”. Thus, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address “F010 (H)” are data for displaying the lower digit (“9” in this example) of the credit amount, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are , Data for displaying the upper digit (“2” in this example) of the number of credits. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of credits is “50 (D)”, the stored data value is in the range of “0” to “50”.
In the present embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as the display data of the credit number display LED 76.

The address “F011 (H)” is a storage area for the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquired number data is data to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In the acquired number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying upper digits. Data.
In the present embodiment, at the time of winning a small win, the payout number corresponding to the winning small win is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, so the payout number data corresponding to the winning small win is stored as the acquired number data. More specifically, when the small role wins and the medal is paid out, the acquired number data is added with the payout of the medal, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when “1 (H)” is stored as the acquired number data, “01” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F040 (H)” to be described later, for example, “8 (H)” is stored when the eight-copies wins. (Including addition to credits), the number is decremented by “1” in accordance with the number of payouts, such as “8” → “7” →... → “0”.
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored at the address “F011 (H)” is, for example, “0” → “1” → “2” →. Thus, each time one medal is paid out, “1” is added. Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up as “0” → “1” → “2” →... → “8”.

  In this embodiment, “88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during the setting change, the setting change display data for displaying “88” is stored as the acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the acquired number display LED 78, it is possible to identify that the setting is being changed from the front side of the gaming machine. Further, by lighting “88” and all the segments, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (there is no segment that cannot be turned on). Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out is fifteen, it can be understood that when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the number of medals is not displayed.

  Furthermore, in a twelfth embodiment to be described later, when a condition for instructing a prescribed number (the number of medals to be bet in the current game) is satisfied, the game is not started (before betting is possible, or the start switch 41 is operated). Before this is done), the specified number is instructed (displayed and notified) to the acquired number display LED 78. In the present embodiment, “0A” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 in order to indicate the specified number “2”. Therefore, when the specified number is designated, designated designated number display data for displaying “0A” is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the specified instruction number display data for displaying “0A” is “0B (H)”.

  Further, at the time of winning the push order bell or the like in the AT, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The pressing order instruction information corresponding to the winning numbers “3” to “8” shown in FIG. 58 to be described later is “= 1” to “= 6”, respectively. Therefore, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. Although details will be described later, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information “= 1” to “= 6” are “A1 (H)” to “A6 (H)”, respectively. For example, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed in the game having won the winning number “3”, the pressing order instruction number “A1 (H)” is stored as the acquired number data. As a result, the push order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

  When a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is “HP”, error number display data for displaying “HP” is stored as acquired number data.

The address “F030 (H)” is a storage area for the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether the replay and the accessory are operated. For example, during 1BB operation, the D2 bit of the operation state flag is set to "1".
This operation state flag is updated in a game start set process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag described later is read, and when it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed, and the operation state is determined. The D0 bit of the flag is set to "1".
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check processing) described later.
The operating state flag of the accessory is also cleared by the game end check processing (not shown in FIG. 50).

The address “F031 (H)” is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit, and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned by the operation state flag are respectively assigned the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag.
During the main process of FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination unit 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay has been stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to “1”.
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically, in step S279 (start switch receiving process) during the main process of FIG.

  The address “F040 (H)” is a storage area for the number-of-payouts data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when the small win wins in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When the small winning combination is won, the payout amount data corresponding to the small winning combination is stored, and the medal payout process is executed. Here, the payout number data is decremented by one for each payout of one medal (addition of “1” to the number of credits or payout of one actual medal (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. Thus, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes “0”.

  The address “F041 (H)” is a storage area of the number-of-payouts data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Like the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small win is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted for each medal payout process, and the value stored first is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the medal payout number update processing of the next game (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when the small payout of eight payouts wins in the game, “8 (H)” is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game, when the payout does not win, the payout number data buffer is used. “0” is overwritten.

The address “F042 (H)” is a storage area for the automatic bet amount data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet amount data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of a replay winning, and in the present embodiment, “2” or “3” is stored.
The automatic bet amount data is set in step S325 during the game start set processing of FIG.
The address “F043 (H)” is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is stored. The bet number data is performed in the medal management processing (detecting inserted medals and performing betting processing and credit addition processing) in step S276 during the main processing in FIG.

The address “F051 (H)” is a storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is as shown in FIG. 34 (A), and is updated each time the interrupt processing is performed, as described above.
The address “F052 (H)” is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is the one shown in FIG. 34B, and takes a value according to normal, setting change, or setting confirmation.

The address “F061 (H)” is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores “00000000 (B)” when the section is a normal section, and sets the D0 bit to “1” when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address “F062 (H)” is a storage area of the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes “0”, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes “1”.
Note that the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on simultaneously with the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not have to be turned on.
Specifically, firstly, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, but may be turned on later (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied before the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is never turned on. The advantageous section may be ended without being turned on.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is operated (when the correct answer pressing order is notified) in a gaming state in which the section is an advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”, the advantageous section is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on.
Furthermore, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
Further, at the time of the game end check processing in the last game of the advantageous section, a processing for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the initialization processing of the advantageous section display LED flag storage area (clear processing of the advantageous section display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started, Until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in the constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After the reels 31 are stopped (the game is finished), before the next game is started, before the settlement switch 43 becomes operable.

However, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the winning combination in the game needs to be determined, and therefore the operation before the start switch 41 is operated (before the lottery) is excluded. .
When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated, and after the lottery of the combination is executed, the rotation of the reel 31 is started. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until the vehicle reaches the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

  The address “F063 (H)” is a storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games in the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is “0” during the normal section, and “1500 (D)” is set as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set so that “1” is decremented per game during the advantageous section as well as during the normal section. However, the minimum value is “0”. For this reason, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is “0”, the counter after subtraction becomes “0” even if “1” is subtracted. Therefore, during the normal section, “1” is subtracted for each game, but “0” is maintained. In other words, when “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non- advantageous section).

Also, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)".
The advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at the maximum, and is therefore composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

The address “F065 (H)” is a storage area of the difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference number counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number in the advantageous section, and is also referred to as “MY counter”.
The difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number itself, but stores a “corresponding value” to the accumulated value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to minus, the value is corrected to “0 (H)”. Therefore, “accumulated value of difference sheet ≠ difference counter value”.
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number in the advantageous section has exceeded “2400 (D)”. For this reason, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

The difference number counter only needs to count at least the accumulated value of the difference number in the advantageous section, and need not count in the non- advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when the difference number counter value is updated on the condition that the game is an advantageous section, a process for determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section is required for each game. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the difference number counter value is updated even during the non-advantaged section (normal section). With this configuration, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section for each game, thereby simplifying the processing.

  Further, the difference counter value is updated even when the difference number becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number becomes the data of the descending. However, as a result of the calculation, when the difference counter is data that is carried down, correction is performed to set the difference counter value to “0”.

To give a specific example (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is set to “0 (H)”),
First game: When the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, the difference counter after calculation is “FFFD (H)” and the difference counter after correction is “0 (H)”
Second game: Bet number “3”, payout number “9”, difference counter after calculation “0006 (H)” (no correction)
Third game: bet number “3”, payout number “0”, difference counter after calculation “0003 (H)” (no correction)
Fourth game: Bet number “3”, payout number “1”, difference counter after calculation “0001 (H)” (no correction)
Fifth game: Bet number “3”, payout number “0”, difference counter “FFFE (H)” after calculation, difference counter “0 (H)” after correction
Will be updated as follows.
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is “0 (H)” and the difference counter of the current game is “0 (H)”, the difference counter value reflecting the difference of the game is renewed. Since this is a calculated result, such a case also corresponds to “update” of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the difference number counter value after the calculation is a value with a carry-down, the difference number counter value is corrected to “0” (initial value “0” is set). A method of determining whether a borrow has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference number counter value, for example, when the payout number is larger than the bet number, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference number counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal section, the difference counter value is increased by the number of payouts when a payout based on the winning of the small role is performed, but thereafter, the number of payouts is increased. If is less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

36A and 36B are diagrams (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference number counter value. FIG. 36A shows Example 1 and FIG. 36B shows Example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games, and the vertical axis is the difference number.
Example 1 shows an example in which the difference number first goes in the minus direction with the progress of the game, but the difference number starts to rise from the middle, for example, due to the start of AT. Then, the difference counter is counted as “0” when the difference becomes the lowest value in the course of the game, so the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference counter as the increase of the difference. Is done. As described above, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section is ended when the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” (the next game is controlled so as to be a game in the normal section).

When the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, the advantageous section end condition is satisfied. For example, if the difference counter is exactly “2400 (D)” at the end of the current game, the current game Then, the termination condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied.
Then, in the next game, assuming that the largest difference number in the gaming machine is obtained, since the bet number is “1” and the payout number is “15”, the difference number in the next game is “+14”, The difference number counter value at the end of the next game is “2414 (D)”. When the difference counter is “2414 (D)”, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that can be taken by the difference counter is “2414 (D)”.

The determination as to whether or not the difference counter has exceeded “2400 (D)” is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 and making a determination, but temporarily storing it in a register for updating or the like. Judgment of the difference counter value is also included (the same applies hereinafter).
Further, when it is determined whether or not “2400 (D)” has been exceeded based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that “2400 (D)” has not been exceeded, The difference counter value of the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, control is performed such that the difference number counter value is not stored in the RWM 53 and the difference number counter value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. It is also possible.

  In addition, Example 2 shows an example in which the difference number progresses in the minus direction with the progress of the game as in Example 1, but the difference number started to increase from the middle, for example, due to the start of AT. . In Example 2, when the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. That is, regardless of the accumulated value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game up to that point, if the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, counting from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value, the advantageous section (The next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

When the difference counter is updated during the normal section, the difference counter may exceed “2400 (D)” even during the normal section. For example, when a special role is won many times and a special game is repeated, such a situation may occur. In such a case,
1) a method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts,
2) When the value exceeds "2400 (D)", a method of temporarily resetting the difference counter value to "0" at that point is used.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous section, the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section. Regardless of whether the processing is executed regardless of whether the difference number counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal section, the processing is cleared.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process unique to the advantageous section, the difference counter is not cleared even if the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal section.
When the advantageous section is started (first game in the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (initial value “0” is set. Step S354 in FIG. 45 described later). Therefore, there is no problem regardless of the number of difference counters before the start of the advantageous section.
And
1) When the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous section,
2) When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games,
Satisfies the termination condition of the advantageous section.
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference number counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent the data (value) relating to the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section ends and the normal section is started. Clearing of the difference number counter is executed in step S435 in FIG. 51 described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference number counter value and the advantageous section, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases with the progress of the game, and the difference number further decreases from the point in time when the advantageous section starts (“A” in the figure) to the point “B” in the figure. An example is shown. Note that AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, but the CZ, precursor, and AT are being prepared at the beginning of the advantageous section (for example, when the RT state is in the low-probability state, the RT state is shifted from the low-probability state to the high-probability state). In the case of a specification that starts from the midway of waiting for the replay to win), the difference number may decrease even after the advantageous section is started. Further, even when the AT is started, the difference number may be reduced in a case where the push order bell is not easily won in the middle of the pressing order bell.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at the time of "A" in the figure. In addition, as described above, the difference counter value maintains “0” in a situation where the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, in the figure, the difference number counter value remains “0” from the point “A” to the point “B”.
Also, an example is shown in which the difference number has started to increase from the point “B”. As a result, the difference counter value also increases. When it is determined that the difference number counter value has exceeded “2400 (D)” (when the point “C” is reached in the figure), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended. (Move to normal section).

  As described above, instead of the difference number from the start of the advantageous section, the positive counting by the difference number counter is started from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value (“B”) after the start of the advantageous section. The medal is not given to the player beyond the range where the number of balls is increased (the range from “B” to “C” in FIG. 37A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the gambling of the player from being upset.

The above points will be described more specifically with numerical values as examples.
For example, if the specification is such that an AT is started by lottery after the start of the advantageous section, if the advantageous section is non-AT, the difference may decrease with the progress of the game.
For example, assume that the player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section is started, but the AT is not started and the game is stopped when the difference number becomes “−200”.

Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts a game with the gaming machine, the AT is won when the difference number becomes “−50”, and the AT is started. Then, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued after the start of the advantageous section until the difference number exceeds “+2400”, the player Y can acquire a medal of “2400 + 250 = 2650”. .
Therefore, as described above, after the advantageous section is started, the end condition is set as “from the point in time when the difference number becomes the minimum value to“ exceeds “+2400” ”, so that, for example, the other player's fit The goal is to prevent them from being acquired, and to keep their gambling feelings up.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 37B shows an example in which the difference number decreases in the normal section, the point “D” in the middle turns positive, and the advantageous section starts from the point “E”. In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value is positive at the point “E” in the drawing. However, at the start of the advantageous section ("E" in the figure), the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, that is, updated to "0").
Therefore, the increment before the advantageous section (the increment from “D” to “E”) is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be counted up from the point "E", and the advantageous section ends when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)".

The description returns to FIG.
The address “F067 (H)” is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not an AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during a non-AT and is set to "1" during an AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when an AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 in FIG. 46 described later. The AT flag is turned off at the time of the end of the game in the final game of the AT, and is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) described later. Note that the data cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes the AT flag.

The address “F068 (H)” is a storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games during AT (including ART). When the AT game number counter becomes “0”, unlike the advantageous section clear counter, counting (subtraction) thereafter is stopped.
The AT game number counter is updated (subtracted) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main processing (step S281 in FIG. 41 described later).

Further, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed “255 (D)”, the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is equal to or less than "255 (D)" at maximum, the AT game number counter may be constituted by a 1-byte counter.
When starting the AT (or when shifting to during AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a fixed value or may be determined by lottery or the like at the time of winning the AT. Further, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to “0” without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT, the number of AT games may be increased, and when the additional lottery is won, the number of AT games may be increased. In this case, the increment is added to the AT game number counter.
The AT game number counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

  In the present embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is exemplified, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of the AT, an initial value of the obtainable difference number is set. When the player wins the additional game, the number of additional games is added. Then, every time there is a payout, the difference number of the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes “0”, the AT ends.

Subsequently, each process during the game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the processing is started from the program start processing in FIG.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, in next step S202, the main control board 50 initializes a register. Specific processing includes, for example, setting of a communication speed of a serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting of an interrupt type (for example, setting to a maskable interrupt, etc.), and a parity bit to be added to a control command to be transmitted. (For example, setting to even parity). In other words, the initial values required for the normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

  Next, proceeding to step S203, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In this embodiment, when the power is turned off, the power-off processing completed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54 described later). The power-off processing completed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. When it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the value is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. More specifically, a checksum is calculated in the same range (for example, a work area, an unused area, and a stack area used by the program) as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed during the power-off processing.
In step S205, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 53 that has calculated the checksum at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for calculating the checksum. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S204 to continue the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

Also, in the following processing, when data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is initialized, in the present embodiment, the same processing is executed in the specified range of the RWM 53.
When it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, the abnormal value is set as the power-off recovery data without performing the checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

  In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, a B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and that the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 has been normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value (when “No” in step S203), or when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 in step S204, the power-off processing is performed. An abnormal value is stored as return data.

  In the next step S207, the level data of the predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). Next, in step S208, it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51. In this embodiment, the “designated switch” is a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened) among the predetermined input ports 51, and a setting door switch. (The door provided on the setting key switch. The setting door may be omitted.) The signal of the setting key switch (the switch which is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction) There are three.

Then, the signal of the door switch is ON (the front door 12 is open), the signal of the setting door switch is ON (the setting door is open), and the signal of the setting key switch is ON. Only allow changes in settings. When all three designation switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process of step S212. However, when at least one designation switch is not on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change process of step S212. .
That is, regardless of whether the signal of the door switch is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch is off (the setting door is closed), the signal of the setting key switch is not changed. Cannot be turned on and there is a high possibility of fraud.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all the designation switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that all the switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is abnormal. The power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined that the data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether the setting change disable flag is on. Here, the setting change disable flag is one of data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled during a start switch receiving process (step S279) to a game end check process (step S301) in FIG. 41 described later. Is a flag to be executed. When the setting change disable flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S211. When the flag is not ON, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212.
In the present embodiment, the setting change disable flag is provided. However, if the setting can always be changed, the setting change disable flag may not be provided. In that case, the processing corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

  In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This processing is equivalent to the processing in step S209. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213 to perform a power-return process (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S214 to perform a non-recoverable error process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG.
First, in step S221, a “predetermined range” is stored in a register as an initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53. Here, “in use area” refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data related to the progress of the game. The range shown in FIG. 35 is all within the use area. On the other hand, "out of use area" described later refers to an area for storing data not related to the progress of the game in the storage area of the RWM 53. Specifically, a storage area for storing data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is given.

The “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off processing has been normally executed, and includes setting value data (address “F000 (H)”), a gaming state (for example, an RT state), and a winning state. Is defined as a “predetermined range” in which the flag of the special combination having “” is not initialized.
Therefore, in a twelfth embodiment to be described later, when the power is off and the BB2 is in the inside (when the winning flag of BB2 is on) before the power is turned off, the setting change process is executed if the power is turned off normally. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the “predetermined range” does not include data on the advantageous section and the AT. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the addresses “F061 (H)” to “F068 (H)” are to be initialized here.

Next, proceeding to step S222, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S222 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power interruption is not normal, and is the entire range within the use area including the set value data (address “F000 (H)”).

  Then, the process proceeds to step S224, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S224 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S226.

  In step S226, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Note that the purpose of saving the AF register is to originally save the F (flag) register here, but the AF register is saved for the sake of instruction. Then, the process proceeds to step S227, where a predetermined range outside the used area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM 53. The “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off processing has been executed normally.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S228 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and is an entire range including a ring buffer storing the number of games and the number of payouts for performing the ratio display.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and the initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, activation setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S202 are set. In the present embodiment, since the timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process, a process for setting the timer interrupt cycle (“2.235 ms” in the present embodiment) is included. Then, after the process of step S233, an interrupt process is executed. In other words, the configuration is such that interrupt processing is not executed before “interruption activation”.
In the next step S234, an output request set at the start of the setting change is performed. In this process, a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is set (stored) in a register in order to notify the sub-control board 80 of the start of the setting change process.

The “output request set” means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80. Further, the control command here does not mean only a command to be actually transmitted, but also means a command that is a source of a command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S235, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

  Next, proceeding to step S236, the main control board 50 executes a wait process (wait process) for 2 bytes for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, the process waits until the number of interrupts “224” is counted (“1” is subtracted for each number of interrupts, and the set number of interrupts becomes “0”). This standby is also called a delay process or a standby process because the main process does not proceed. During the waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting processing), the main processing is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt processing is executed.

  As described above, the wait process (wait process) for two bytes is performed in step S236 because the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the sub-control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 executes a waiting process for two bytes. In particular, this is because the main control board 50 cannot know whether or not the initialization processing has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, when the sub-control board 80 is still in the process of initialization, the main control board 50 has already completed the initialization, and the process further proceeds. It can be prevented that the progress of the control processing of 80 is not synchronized.
After execution of the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts the initialization of the RWM 83. I do. Thus, after the sub-control board 80 completes the initialization processing of the RWM 83, the main control board 50 proceeds to the processing after step S238.

  Note that the control command at the start of the setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the waiting process for 2 bytes is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to the processes in step S237 and thereafter (the main process does not proceed).

  After the end of the waiting process for two bytes in step S236, the process proceeds to step S237, where the setting change display data is stored as the acquisition number data. Next, the process proceeds to step S238, and the value “00011100 (B)” corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag.

By the processing of steps S237 and S238, when the interrupt processing is executed after these processing, the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (the acquired number display LED 78 and the set value display LED 73) can be turned on.
Specifically, in the interrupt processing executed after the processing in step S238, “8” can be displayed on the digits 3a and 4a (“88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), and the digit b5 (set value display) can be displayed. The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Since the acquired number data and the LED display request flag have been initialized by the initialization processing in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S224, the values before step S237 are “0”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S239 to execute an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. After one elapse of the interruption time, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether an operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change switch is turned on by determining the rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the set value data (address “F000 (H)”) of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When the interrupt processing is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (wait for interrupt) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, when the process in step S239 is not provided, if it is determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on, the setting value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S242. If not, the process proceeds to step S240, and it is determined whether the rising data of the setting change switch is on.

  If it is determined in step S240 that the switch is on, if at least one interrupt process is performed, the rising data of the setting change switch is turned off. However, until the interrupt processing is executed, it is determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is ON. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by “2” or more by operating the setting change switch only once. Therefore, in step S239, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

  In step S243, it is determined whether a setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, and the acquired number data is cleared (set to "0"). This is for deleting the display of “88” indicating that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245, and the value “00011111 (B)” corresponding to the normal status is stored in the LED display request flag.

The display of the digits 3a and 4a (acquired number display LED 78) is changed from "88" to "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S244.
In addition, “0” is displayed on each of the digits 1a and 2a (“00” is displayed on the credit amount display LED 76) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing in step S245. Also, since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be turned on. On the other hand, digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) is not lit because the setting is not being changed or the setting is not being checked.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S246, where an output request at the end of setting change is set as in step S234. In this process, the setting change process is terminated, and the data corresponding to the determined set value (specifically, the set value data stored in the address “F000 (H)”) is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 side. Is a process of setting a control command to be notified to the user. Next, the process proceeds to step S247, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248 to shift to a main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power return process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer refers to an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 for storing data (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, and the like) at the time of power failure when power failure occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read, and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether within the range of set value 1 to set value 6), in other words, “F000 (H)” It is determined whether or not the set value data is in the range of “0 (H)” to “5 (H)”. When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253. When it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an “E6” error occurs, the process proceeds to step S264, and the process returns to the non-recoverable error process. .

In step S253, an unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, the RWM 53 in the range set in step S253 is initialized. Here, even in an unused area, a value may be stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like. If a value is stored in the unused area, the unused area may lead to a bad act such as fraud. Therefore, the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). I have.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (an unused area in the used area) has been completed.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as the process of step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, the RWM 53 in the range set in step S257 is initialized.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (an unused area outside the used area) has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is the same as the process of step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, a predetermined input port 51 is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S262 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and is similar to the above-described step S233.
Next, the process proceeds to step S263, in which the power-off processing completed flag is cleared, that is, set to “0”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power return processing,
1) In the program start processing of FIG. 38, if it is determined “No” in step S203 (when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality when the checksum is calculated in step S204, step In S206, the abnormal value is stored as the return data after the power is turned off. In this case, since “Yes” is determined in step S209, the process proceeds to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 39, since “No” is determined in steps S222 and S228, the entire range inside and outside the use area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, after “F000 (H)” All data is initialized.

  2) In the program start processing, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, and the checksum calculation is also normally performed, and when the processing proceeds to the setting change processing, in FIG. Since “Yes” is determined in S228, the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the designated range (within the use area and outside the use area) of the RWM 53 is initialized.

  3) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completed flag is determined to be a normal value, and the checksum calculation is normally performed, and when the setting change processing is not performed, the power return processing in step S213 ( The process moves to FIG. In this case, in FIG. 40, if the set value is normal in step S252, the initialization of the RWM 53 (in the used area and outside the used area) at the time of normal power-on is executed. This initialization is a process of initializing an unused area of the RWM 53 as described above.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the present embodiment. The main process is a process of one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated for each game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer indicates an area of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, a register value, an instruction process of a main process before an interrupt process, and the like) at the time of a power failure when a power failure occurs, The setting of the stack pointer is a process of setting the register value to an initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, a game start set process (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42 to be described later, and is a process such as generation, update, and storage of an operation state flag.
In the next step S273, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet at the present time, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there is a bet medal based on the number of bets read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S276. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on, and when it is on, a process of shifting to a setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S276, a management process of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has been cleaned, determining whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

  In the next step S277, a process of updating the soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (adding, for example, "1") a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the role lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range from “0” to “65535 (D)”. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to a value before the update may be executed.

  In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the bet number has not reached the specified number of the game, "No" is determined in the step S278.

In step S279, the process at the time of receiving the start switch is executed. This process is a process for setting a setting change disable flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, setting the number of outputs for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like, and the like. .
In the next step S280, the acquired number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the designated prescribed number display data and the payout number data are stored as the acquired number data before that, the data is cleared.
Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, a specified number may be indicated (displayed) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the game is started. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the designated prescribed number display data may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, a process of clearing the acquired number data and displaying (00) the "00" on the acquired number display LED 78 (or turning it off) is executed.
If the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the acquired number data at the time of step S280, the payout number data is cleared in this step S280.

Next, proceeding to step S281, the main control board 50 executes an updating process of the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43 to be described later, and is a process for subtracting the number of AT games when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
In addition, whether or not to increase the number of AT games during the AT is determined based on the result of the role lottery result of the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when the rare role is won, the number of additional games to be added to the AT is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the added amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
Note that, after the start switch is received (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the role lottery process in step S282, or after stopping all the reels 31 (from step S290). The AT game number counter may be updated.
In the specification of the difference number management type AT, when an AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is set after the stop of all the reels 31 and after the medal payout process by winning (after step S300). To update.

  In step S282, the combination lottery means 61 executes a lottery of a combination (corresponding to the above-mentioned "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when an operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of the lottery lottery is obtained in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process of determining whether or not the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning combinations, using a role lottery table is performed.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section shift lottery process. This processing is the processing of FIG. 44 described later. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery is executed together with the advantageous section shift lottery. Note that, as shown in FIG. 44 described later, when the vehicle is in the advantageous section but is not in the AT (for example, when the main game state is CZ), the AT lottery process is executed in step S348 in FIG.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, where a pressing order instruction number is set (M_ORD_INF). This processing is the processing shown in FIG. 48. During the AT, when the instruction function is operated in the game (the instruction number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), the instruction number is generated. This is a process of displaying the pressing order instruction information.

In the next step S285, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed. In this process, a process for determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed is executed. If the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is “1834 (D) (2.235 ms × 1834 ≒ 4099 ms)”. It is. If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum game time is "0", an initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is decremented by "1" for each interruption process. In step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is “0”.

In step S286, the reel control unit 65 controls the drive of the motor 32 and starts the rotation of the reel 31. When the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when the operation signal has been received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31. Is stopped, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290. If it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquired number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, when the indicating function is activated during the AT, pressing order indicating information (for example, “= 1”) may be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes “00” due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, “00010011 (B)” may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off light may be provided as segment data, and the data may be output.

In step S291, the display of the symbol is determined. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304. If it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is performed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not usually stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol that should not be originally displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed on the activated line, it is determined that the symbol is abnormal ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Executes non-recoverable error processing.

If it is determined in step S292 that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293, in which the payout amount is updated. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the payout number data and the payout number data buffer described above.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out a medal corresponding to the winning combination (M_WIN_PAY). This process is a process shown in FIG. 49 described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S295 to perform an interrupt waiting process. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. By the processing in steps S295 and S296, the interruption is prohibited immediately after the interruption.

  In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This processing is similar to the processing in step S256 in FIG. Next, the process proceeds to step S298, where a ratio setting process is executed. The “ratio setting process” is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, and the like in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (composition ratio monitor). After proceeding to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and interruption is permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. As described above, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved, and the interrupt process is prohibited before the execution.

  Note that the reason that the interrupt processing is prohibited during the execution of the ratio setting processing is the processing using a program stored outside the used area, and the processing outside the used area is executed in the main processing. This is because, if an interrupt process is entered in the program, programs in the used area and programs outside the used area are mixed, and the processing becomes complicated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, in which a game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 50 to be described later, and performs a condition device (winning combination) flag clear process and the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, in which an output request set at the time of ending the game and a control command set 1 are performed in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed.
When the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time of the present embodiment is set to the “26846” interrupt ($ 60000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), “26846” is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is decremented by "1" for each interruption process from this point.

When the game standby display time becomes “0”, the acquired number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out for the previous game is “8” and the player has settled the game by operating the adjustment switch 43 and ended the game, “00” is displayed after about one minute. Is done. This has the effect that the clerk in the hall or another player can be recognized as a vacant platform, thereby reducing the vacant platform.
It is to be noted that the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit and lower digit) is not limited to displaying “00” on the acquisition number display LED 78, and the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off and the lower digit may be turned off. May be displayed as "0". In any case, the display may be executed so that the clerk of the hall or another player can recognize the empty stand.

Next, the process proceeds to step S312, where the pressing order instruction number is initialized. This process is a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, data of the symbol combination display flag is obtained. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the symbol combination display flag data is “1”, it is determined as “Yes”, and when it is “0”, it is determined as “No”. When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the obtainable number at the time of 1BB operation (at the time of 1BB game) is stored. This process is a process of storing the maximum obtainable number of 1BB games in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operation state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operation state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
In the next step S317, the operation state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operation state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (at this time, for example, stored in the A register) at the address “F030 (H)” of the RWM 53. As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that time is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S317.
For example, when the symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (at the time of winning 1BB), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from “0” to “1”.

  In the next step S319, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the two games (or at the time of winning twice), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set processing. If it is determined in step S319 that the RB operation has started, the process proceeds to step S320. If it is determined that the RB operation has not started, the process proceeds to step S321.

  In step S320, the number of games and the number of winnings at the time of RB operation are stored. In this process, “2 (H)” is stored (stored) in a game number counter (not shown in FIG. 35) at the time of RB operation provided in the RWM 53, and at the time of RB operation provided in the RWM 53. This is processing for storing (storing) “2 (H)” in a winning number counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to step S321.

  Each of the number-of-games counter at the time of RB operation and the number-of-wins counter at the time of RB operation is set to “2 (H)” as an initial value, and each time the number of games or the number of wins increases by “1”. Is a counter that is decremented by "1". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial values of these counter values are set to “0”, and each time the number of games or winnings increases by “1”, the counter value is incremented by “1”, and these counter values become “2 ( H) ”may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not a condition indicating a specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where the specified number is specified. However, in a twelfth embodiment to be described later, a specified number may be instructed at the time of starting a game, and therefore, this processing is included in this flowchart. When it is determined that the condition for specifying the prescribed number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and when it is determined that the condition for specifying the prescribed number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the designated prescribed number display data is stored as the acquired number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number “2” is specified. When the specified number “2” is specified, “0A” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The designated display number display data for displaying “0A” is defined as “0B (H)” (details will be described later), and in this step S322, “0B (H)” is obtained as the acquired number data. Is stored.
The reason why “0A” is displayed instead of “02” when displaying the prescribed number “2” is to avoid confusion with the payout number, error number, and pressing order instruction information.
The display of the number of payouts is any one of “01” to “15”, and “A” is not displayed in the lower digit. Also, "A" is not displayed in the lower digit of the error number.

Here, the error numbers (numbers displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in the present embodiment are as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (No medal in hopper 35)
H0: Abnormality of payout sensor 37 CE: Medal stay error CP: Invalid medal passing error CH: Abnormality of passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality of insertion sensor 44 C1: Abnormality of token insertion error FE: Sub-tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Opening the front door E1: Power-off recovery error E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value error E7: Random number error

Note that the type of error is not limited to the above. An error in which the upper digit of the error number is “E” means an unrecoverable error.
As described above, since "A" is not displayed in the lower digit of the error number, the error number and the specified instruction number are not confused.
The pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is “= 1” to “= 6”. Therefore, the pressing order instruction information and the specified instruction number are not confused.

  Also, in step S322, there is a case where the payout number data in the previous game is stored as the acquired number data before the designated prescribed number display data is stored as the acquired number data (in the case where the small role has won in the previous game). ). The payout amount data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process for winning (FIG. 49 described later). Therefore, when storing the designated prescribed number display data, the payout number data up to that time may be overwritten. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and a process of clearing the acquired number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

  In the next step S323, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination has been stopped and displayed based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313. If it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S324. If it is determined that the replay symbol combination has not been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals (bet number data) betted in the previous game. Next, the process proceeds to step S325, in which automatic bet amount data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S326, in which an output request for an operating state is set. In a next step S327, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay has been activated or that the 1BB has been activated is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

It should be noted that before (meaning before the filing of the present application, and not meaning "known"; the same applies hereinafter), at the time of addition processing of the bet number, specifically, during the main processing of FIG. In the medal management process, a process of clearing the acquired number data was performed. As a result, even if the small win has been won in the previous game and the payout data at the time of the small win has been stored as the acquired number data, the acquired number data has been cleared during the bet number addition process.
However, in the present embodiment, if the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied before the medal management process is executed, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
When the prescribed number is designated, it is necessary to prevent the designated prescribed number display data from being cleared during the betting process. In the present embodiment, when the specified number is specified, the state in which the specified number is specified is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquired number data is not cleared in the medal management processing. When the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared in the processing of step S280 in FIG.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the specified number is designated, the designated designated number display data is cleared after the start switch 41 is operated. The acquired number data may be cleared (in the medal management processing). In this case, for example, in the bet amount adding process, before executing the acquired number data clearing process, it is determined whether or not the specified number has been designated in the current game, and when it is determined that the specified number has been designated. Means that the acquired number data is not cleared, and when it is determined that the specified number is not designated, the acquired number data is cleared.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether the AT flag is on ("1"). When it is determined that the AT flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not ON, the process according to this flowchart ends. That is, unless the AT is in progress, the AT game number counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether the bet number is “3”. In this process, the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 is read, and it is determined whether or not the bet number of the game is “3”. When the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S333, and when the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart is ended. In the present embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated only when a game is played with the bet number (specified number) “3” during the AT (processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, even during the AT, if the game is started with the bet number (specified number) “2”, the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter are updated regardless of the bet number.

In step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts “1” from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, similarly, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not decremented (updated) if the bet number is not “3” even during the AT.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section shift lottery process in step S283 in FIG.
Note that in the present embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous section shift lottery processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section shift lottery processing and the AT lottery process are executed independently. You may. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be set to only the advantageous section shift lottery processing, and the AT lottery processing may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the bet number (specified number) of the current game is “3”. When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the bet number (specified number) is “3”, the advantageous section shift lottery in step S345 and the advantageous section shift process (process related to the advantageous section) in step S347, which will be described later, can be executed, and step S348 is performed. AT lottery process (process related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the bet number (specified number) is not “3”, these processes are not executed.

  In step S342, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0”. If it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is “0” (non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343. If it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is “1” (it is an advantageous section), step S348 is performed. Proceed to. When the advantageous section type flag is “1” (when the section is already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section shift lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in the current game is the target lottery result, that is, whether or not the role to be the target of the lottery in the advantageous section has been won. Here, although detailed description is omitted, for example, when the special role is won alone, when the special role and the small role are repeatedly won, and when the small role (rare small role) is won, the target lottery result is determined. to decide. The target lottery result does not include non-winning. This is because, in a non-winning game of a role (a game in which the condition device is not operated), the process related to the advantageous section is not executed.
When it is determined in step S343 that the result is the target lottery result, the process proceeds to step S344, and when it is determined that the result is not the target lottery result, the process according to the flowchart is terminated (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed or the advantageous section is not determined. Win).

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Here, although detailed description is omitted, for example, among the roles to be drawn, the middle tier cherry (single winning or overlapping winning with the special role) is set as the fixed role (the role to be always won) in the advantageous section shift lottery. When the middle cherry is won, it may be determined that the result is a specific lottery result.
If it is determined in step S344 that the result is the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347. If it is determined that the result is not the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, when the result is not the specific lottery result, the advantageous section shift lottery is performed, and when the result is the specific lottery result, the advantageous section shift processing (step S347) is executed without performing the advantageous section shift lottery (be sure to shift to the advantageous section). Do). It should be noted that it is also possible to execute the advantageous section shift lottery even with the specific lottery result, and to set to win the advantageous section shift lottery with a 100% probability.

In step S345, an advantageous section shift lottery is performed. The advantage section shift lottery includes, for example, performing a lottery in the same manner as the role lottery or the like, using a lottery table in which the numbers according to the result of the role lottery are predetermined. For example, when the winning number is “A”, the advantageous section is won with a probability of 35%, and when the winning number is “B”, the advantageous section is won with a probability of 60%, and so on. Is mentioned.
If the result of the lottery determination is not the lottery target of the advantageous section, the result is “No” in step S343. Therefore, if “Yes” in step S343, that is, the result of the role lottery targeted for the advantage section shift lottery. At the time, in the advantageous section shift lottery, a lottery is performed by a lottery table having a number of at least “1”. However, the winning probability of the advantageous section shift lottery is set to “1/17500” or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, and it is determined whether or not the winning section has been won in the lottery in step S345. If it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and if it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S347, an advantageous section shift process is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 45, and is a process of setting a flag and a counter based on winning of an advantageous section.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This processing is the processing shown in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In addition, not limited to the example of the present embodiment, the AT may always be started (without performing the AT lottery) when shifting to the advantageous section. Alternatively, non-AT may always be set when shifting to the advantageous section, and after shifting to the advantageous section (for example, after the predetermined number of games has been exhausted), it may be determined by lot whether or not to execute the AT.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section shift processing in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on the advantageous section type flag ("1"). Next, proceeding to step S352, the main control board 50 sets an advantageous section clear game counter to an initial value of the number of games in the advantageous section “1500 (D)”.

In the next step S353, “0” is set in the difference counter. The difference number counter is continuously updated during the normal section (non-advantage section), and when it is not the advantageous section, if it is always set to “0” at the end of the game, the processing of step S353 is unnecessary. However, the initial value “0” may be set for noise prevention or the like.
At the end of the advantageous section, the initialization process including the difference counter is performed, so that the difference counter is "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of the specification in which the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous section, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous section is “0”, so that the processing in step S353 can be omitted. .
On the other hand, when the difference counter is continuously updated during the non-advantaged section as in the present embodiment, the difference number counter may be positive even immediately before the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, "0" is set to the difference number counter in step S353. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is executed based on a winning combination lottery result. In this lottery, as in step S345, the AT lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning number is determined for each winning lottery result.
Note that the AT lottery need not always be executed, and for example, a role lottery result that is not determined by the AT and a role lottery result that is always determined by the AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not an AT has been won in the AT lottery in step S361. When it is determined that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and when it is determined that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes an AT initial game number determination process. This process is a process shown in FIG. 47 described later. Next, proceeding to step S364, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Here, the main game state of the present embodiment includes normal (non-advantaged section), CZ (advantaged section and non-AT), AT, 1BB operation. It is also possible to provide a precursor as the main game state after the AT win and before the start of the AT, but in the present embodiment, for simplicity of explanation, when the AT is won, the AT is started immediately. And In addition, the information of the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that the AT has not been won, and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to CZ. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial game frequency determination processing in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, in a step S371, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in the current game is the winning of the determined combination. As described above, a rare combination such as a middle cherry is set as the fixed combination. When it is determined that the fixed combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the fixed combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to “100 (D)” and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to “30 (D)” and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the example of FIG. 47, the specification is such that the initial game number of the AT is distributed according to whether or not the winning combination is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A lottery may be executed. In other words, any one of the plurality of game times may be selected even if the result is one combination lottery result.
Also, during the AT, the AT game frequency determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an additional lottery of the AT game frequency. When the additional lottery is won in the AT game number, the determined additional number is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not an instruction condition (a condition for operating an instruction function) is satisfied. If the game is an AT and a winning combination having an advantageous pushing order such as a pushing order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
In addition, when the player wins the advantageous section in this game ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and wins the AT (when "Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), the advantageous section starts from the next game. Is not an advantageous section this time. Therefore, the instruction function cannot be operated in the current game, so that the determination in step S381 is “No”.
If it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and if it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the process in this flowchart ends.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is “3”. In this process, by reading the bet amount data or the automatic bet amount data of the RWM 53, it is determined whether or not the bet amount is “3”.
When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (performing the processing relating to the instruction function) is set to the bet number “3” (one specified number). Therefore, even when, for example, a game is started with the bet number “2” during the AT and a winning combination having an advantageous pushing order (for example, a pushing order bell) is won, the indicating function is not activated (the correct answering order is Not announced).

In a next step S383, a winning number (condition device number) is set. The winning number (condition device number) determined in the role lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S384 to set a pressing order instruction number table (not shown). Here, the head address of the pressing order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S385.

In step S385, the designated address data is set. In this process, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as the offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the top address of the pressing order instruction number table is obtained. As a result, the A register stores the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (the push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area (an area for storing the push order instruction number; not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
In the next step S387, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored as the acquired number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the winning combinations are the same as those in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment) described later. Then, when the winning numbers “3” to “8” are won during the AT, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the acquired number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Push order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Push order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Push order instruction number "A6 (H)"

  For example, when the winning number "3" is won during the AT, the pushing order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquired number data by the pushing order instruction number setting process of FIG. As a result, the pressing order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1 (H)” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG.

After step S387, the process advances to step S388 to determine whether or not the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether or not the game state (RT or main game state) of the current game is a game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”. In addition, whether or not the game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1” is set in advance, and here, it is determined whether or not the game state is set in advance. Specifically, the data of the current RT and the main game state are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and by reading this data, the game state of the current game exceeds the section Sim payout rate “1”. Is determined. When it is determined that the section Sim payout rate is more than "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the section Sim payout rate is not more than "1", the process according to this flowchart is ended. I do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on yet, and when the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is displayed. Since the condition to be turned on is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a win is made in the advantageous section shift lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the game of the next game. Alternatively, after shifting to the advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even in a gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”, at an arbitrary timing (when the arbitrarily set lighting condition is satisfied) ), The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of the number-of-payouts data in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S392, where it is determined whether or not medals are paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number-of-payouts data (A register value) is “0”. Then, when it is determined that the value is "0", that is, when it is determined that there is no payout of medals, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that there is a payout of medals, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the credit amount data is obtained.
Next, the process proceeds to step S394, and it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached a limit value. Specifically, when the credit amount data acquired in step S393 is “50 (D)”, it is determined that the credit amount has reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S398, where the acquired credit amount data is “50 (D)”. (D) ", it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the flow advances to step S395.

In step S395, a standby time at the time of credit addition is set. In the present embodiment, the number of interrupt processes “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) is set in order to set about 100 ms as the standby time. Specifically, “00000000 (B)” is set as the B register value, and “00101110 (B)” is set as the C register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S396, where a waiting process for a 2-byte time is executed. In this process, the value of the BC register is subtracted for each interrupt process, and the process waits until the value becomes "0".

  When the two-byte waiting process in step S396 ends, the flow advances to step S397 to add "1" to the value of the credit amount data. As a result, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 becomes “+1” due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S397. For example, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 changes from “08” to “09”. After the processing in step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, one medal payout process (process of paying out actual medals to the player from the hopper 35) is executed. In this process, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and one of the medals is correctly paid out when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off at a predetermined timing as shown in FIGS. to decide.
By the above processing, the credit number is added until the credit number reaches the limit value, and when the credit number is at the limit value, the processing of paying out the actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, “1” is added to the acquired number data. Thereby, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes “+1”. For example, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from “02” to “03”.
In the next step S400, “1” is subtracted from the payout number data. In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S401, and it is determined whether or not the medal payout is completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the updated number-of-payouts data has become “0”. When it is determined that the number-of-payouts data is “0”, the process according to this flowchart ends, and when it is determined that the number-of-payouts data is not “0”, the process returns to step S393 to continue the process.

In the payout process described above, when performing the payout process of adding “1” to the number of credits, a standby time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. Thereby, it is possible to show the player that the display of the credit number display LED 76 is counting up. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is "08" and eight medals are added thereto, "display" 08 "→ 100 ms standby processing → display" 09 "→ 100 ms Standby processing →... → 100 ms standby processing → display “16”. On the other hand, if a standby time is not provided when adding the number of credits “1”, it looks as if the display changed instantaneously from “08” to “16”.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of credits, by executing a waiting process for two bytes for each "1" addition, the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side ("Plurul ... )) And the count up of the number of credits can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number of "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the waiting process for two bytes in steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven and paid out, so that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a waiting process for two bytes.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, a process of clearing a flag of the condition device (also referred to as winning information; stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) is performed. This processing is a processing for clearing the condition device other than the special combination, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the activated line, the processing for clearing also the special combination condition device is executed. In the next step S412, a process of extinguishing the replay display LED 79f is performed. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to “0”. Next, the process proceeds to step S413, where the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operation state flag to “0”.

In the next step S414, it is determined whether or not the AT game number counter has become “0”. Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main processing of FIG. 41, as described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated after the start switch receiving process (step S279 in FIG. 41), but is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. It may be executed before the check process) or in the process of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Further, in the present embodiment, an example of the game number management type AT for updating the AT game number counter is shown. However, in the case of the difference number management type AT, in step S414, the AT difference number counter is set to “0”. It is determined whether or not it has become. The AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process for winning (step S294 in FIG. 41).
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S415, and when it is determined that the counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process proceeds to step S416 to execute advantageous section counter management. This process is a process of executing updating of the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter, and is a process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52 described later. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIGS. 51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. FIG. 51 shows Example 1, and FIG. 52 shows Example 2.
In the advantageous section counter management, the following processing is executed.
1) Updating of the advantageous section clear counter 2) Updating of the difference number counter 3) Judgment as to whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied 4) When satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section, initialization (clearing) of data relating to the advantageous section )
The advantageous section counter management is executed irrespective of the bet number (specified number).
In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the advantageous section counter management is performed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non- advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured that it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section counter management is executed only during the advantageous section.

In the example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, “F063 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, “1” is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
“0010 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “000F (H)”
“0001 (H)” → subtraction of “1” → “0000 (H)” (zero flag = 1)
“0000 (H)” → subtraction of “1” → “0000 (H)” (carry flag = 1)

  As described above, even if “1” is subtracted from “0000 (H)”, no carry-down occurs, and “0000 (H)” is maintained. As described above, no matter what the value before the subtraction is, since it is only one instruction (one step) for subtracting “1”, it is determined whether or not the count value before the update is “0”. Is unnecessary, and the process of adding the value of the carry flag after the subtraction is unnecessary. Therefore, the time required for updating the count value can be significantly reduced. In addition, with such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section from the value of the advantageous section clear counter, or whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, the game in the advantageous section is executed in 1500). It is not necessary to determine whether or not the game has been executed or whether or not an arbitrary end condition has been satisfied.

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction was “0”. This processing is determined based on whether or not the carry flag has become “1” in the subtraction processing in step S422.
When the carry flag is “1” (when the value before subtraction is “0”), the process proceeds to step S436. When the carry flag is not “1” (when the value before subtraction is not “0”), Proceed to step S424. Note that when the carry flag becomes “1” (when the value before the subtraction is “0”), the current game is not a game in an advantageous section (a game in a non-advantage section (a normal section). ).

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is “0”. This processing is determined based on whether or not the zero flag has become “1” in the subtraction processing in step S422. That is, it is determined whether the value before the subtraction is “1”.
When the zero flag is “1”, the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not “1” (when the subtraction result is not “0”), the process proceeds to step S425. In addition, when the zero flag becomes “1” (when the subtraction result is “0”), the game in the advantageous section in this game is ended (the next game is a game in a non- advantageous section (normal section)). That means).

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is obtained. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S426, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay operation symbol is displayed in the current game (whether or not a replay has won). In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that the re-game operation symbol has been displayed. When it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S434, and when it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, the number-of-payouts data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the number-of-payouts data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the payout number to the difference number counter is executed. In this process, the A register value (payout number data buffer value) is added to the HL register value (difference counter), and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S429 to acquire the value of the bet amount data. This process is a process of reading the bet amount data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter. In this process, the A register value is subtracted from the HL register value, and the subtraction result is stored in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value is less than “0”, the carry flag becomes “1”.

  In the next step S431, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction in step S430 is less than “0”. This processing determines whether or not the carry flag has become “1” by the subtraction in step S430, and when the carry flag is “1”, determines that the subtraction result has become less than “0”, and proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not “1” (when the subtraction result is not less than “0”), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing the HL register value (setting the value to "0") is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference number counter value is stored. This processing is to store the HL register value in the difference counter. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes “0”.
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference number counter has exceeded an upper limit value. The upper limit of the difference counter is set to “2400 (D)”. In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and “2401 (D)”. In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag is "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag is "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the value of the HL register is smaller), it is determined that the value does not exceed the upper limit value, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value exceeds the upper limit (when the carry flag is “0”), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area relating to the advantageous section (clears the data relating to the advantageous section). The data relating to the advantageous section includes an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference number counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game number counter, and the like. Further, there is information on a main game state. The information on the advantageous section does not include the RT state number, the LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, “F000 (H)” to “F052 (H)” are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Here, it is assumed that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the end of the advantageous section causes the LED display counter to become “0”. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when the LED display counter is “00000010 (B)”, the LED display counter is normally updated to “00000001 (B)” in the next interrupt processing, and the LED display counter is initialized. Although the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be turned on, the LED display counter becomes "00010000 (B)". Therefore, the display of the LED corresponding to “00000001 (B)” of the LED display counter is delayed, so that the LED may appear to be turned off momentarily.

Further, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (total game number counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value of minimum game time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Information of the input port 51 6) Data of the control command buffer 7) Data of the stack area 8) Information of the external signal The above is an example of typical data, and the data that is not cleared is limited to the above data. It does not mean that it can be done.

  Next, proceeding to step S436, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0” (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not “0”, particularly when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is “1” (advantaged section) in the present embodiment, the process proceeds to step S437. At this point, the advantageous section type flag being “1” means that the lottery of the advantageous section was won in this game, and the advantageous section type flag was set to “1” in step S351 in FIG. In this case, it is determined that “Yes” is determined in step S423 and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, since the advantageous section type flag has been cleared in step S435, it is not determined to be “No” in step S436.

  In step S437, an initial value is set in the advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting “1500 (D)” in the advantageous section clear counter. Here, “1500 (D)” is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that “F063 (H)” is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the above-described advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference number counter, the payout number is first added (step S428), and then the bet number is subtracted (step S430). This processing is performed for the following reason.
For example, when the difference counter is “2 (D)”, it is assumed that the bet number is “3 (D)” and the payout number is “9 (D)”.
Here, when the bet number is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1 (D) (actually," FFFF (H) ")", and the carry flag becomes "1". When the number of payouts is added, "9 (D)" is added to "-1 (D)", so that "8 (D)" is obtained and the carry flag is set to "1" (carry increases. To indicate that this occurs).

  Since the difference number of the game this time is “+6”, the carry flag becomes “1” simply by adding the difference number “+6” to the difference number counter “2 (D)” before the update, and the irregularity is irregular. A situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether the subtraction result is less than “0”) cannot be determined based on whether the carry flag is “1”. If the determination is made based on whether the carry flag is “1”, “Yes” is determined in step S431 even though no carry-down has occurred, and the difference counter is initialized in step S432. You will set the value. Note that the carry flag is a flag that is set to “1” in any case where a carry or a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)" and the payout number "9 (D)" is first added, the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that time, and thereafter the bet is placed. When the number is subtracted, it becomes "8 (D)". In this case, no carry occurs, so the carry flag is “0”.
For the above reason, when the difference counter is updated, the payout number is first added, and then the bet number is subtracted, so that the determination process of step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

  In the advantageous section counter management of the present embodiment, first, the subtraction processing of the advantageous section counter (step S422) is performed, and when the value before the subtraction is “0” (“Yes” in step S423, ie, If it is a non-advantaged section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the process of updating the difference number counter (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, the present embodiment is configured to execute the advantageous section counter management irrespective of whether the area is an advantageous section or a non-advantaged section. The processing efficiency is increased by not executing. For this reason, the processing order is such that the subtraction processing of the advantageous section clear counter is performed first, and then the difference number counter is updated. Of course, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section. If the specification is such that the subtraction process of the advantageous section clear counter and the update process of the difference counter are performed during the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. It is also possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter prior to the process.

  Further, even when “Yes” is determined in the determination in step S426 (at the time of winning the replay), the processing in step S434 is executed. By doing in this way, even if an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference sheet counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, “Yes” is determined in step S434. , The advantageous section can be ended. On the other hand, when such confirmation is unnecessary, if “Yes” in step S426, the processing of this flowchart may be ended.

In the example of FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the replaying operation symbol has been stopped and displayed in step S426, and if it is determined that the replaying operation symbol has been stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is updated (steps S427 to S427). S430) is skipped to speed up the processing.
In particular, in a game in which the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the payout number of the game is regarded as “0” (deemed payout number) and the bet number of the next game is regarded as “0”, and the difference counter is updated. . However, for example, an SB (Single Bonus) is provided as a winning combination during an advantageous section, and when the SB is won, one SB game with a bet number of “1” is executed in the next game. In some cases, the replay is won and the replaying operation symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the bet number is “3” (a game other than the SB game is impossible with the bet number “1”). However, in this case, the difference payout number in the SB game and the bet number of the next game do not match, so how to count the difference counter becomes a problem.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference number counter in the game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of the advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 52, the same processes as those in FIG. 51 are denoted by the same step numbers.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the payout number is first added to the difference counter, and then the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter.
In contrast, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the bet number is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the payout number is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the payout number is added after the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter, the carry flag may be set to “1” even if the carry-down does not occur eventually. It has been described that whether or not the carry flag is “0” cannot be determined based on whether or not the carry flag is “1”.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the payout number is added (Step S428) after subtracting the bet number from the difference counter (Step S430), and in Step S441, the value of the carry flag is not referred to. It is determined whether the operation result is less than “0”.
More specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, among the HL register values, whether the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register storing the upper digit) value is “1” or not is determined in step S441. It is determined whether or not the calculation result of is less than “0”.

For example,
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
Assume that
In this case, the difference counter value after the calculation is
0000 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
It becomes.
Note that “/” indicates a delimiter of every four bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before the operation is “0000 (H)”, but the HL register value before the operation is not “0000 (H)” and “the difference number of current game> HL register Value ", for example,
This time difference of game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
It becomes.

Furthermore, if the HL register value is not “0000 (H)” and “the difference number of current game <HL register value”, for example, first,
This time difference of game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
It becomes.

Second,
This time difference of game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
It becomes.

Furthermore, third,
This time difference of game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after operation)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
It becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference counter is “2400 (D)”. Here, when “2400 (D)” is represented by a binary number,
"0000/1001/0110/0000 (B)"
It becomes.
Since the upper limit value of the difference number counter is “2400 (D)”, when a value exceeding “2400 (D)” is stored in the difference number counter, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
At the end of the current game, the difference number counter value becomes “2400 (D)”, but since it did not exceed “2400 (D)”, it was determined that the end condition of the advantageous section was not satisfied, and the next game was started. Suppose you have migrated. Then, in the next game, the difference number increases the most when the bet number is “1” and the payout number is “15 (D)”, so the difference number in the game is “14 (D)”. It becomes.
Therefore, the difference counter value in this case is “2414 (D)”.
Here, when “2414 (D)” is represented by a binary number,
"0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)"
It becomes.

Further, when the difference counter value becomes “2414 (D)”, it exceeds “2400 (D)”, so that the difference counter is cleared to “0 (D)” in the game.
As described above, the maximum value that can be taken by the difference counter during the game is “2414 (D)”, that is, “0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)”.

Therefore, when the HL register value is “2414 (D)”,
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
And the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is “0”.
Therefore, when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of “0 (D)” to “2414 (D)”, the D7 bit of the H register value is always “0”.

As described above, the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the H register value is always “0” and never becomes “1” except in the case where the digit is borrowed.
In order for the D7 bit of the H register value to be “1”, the difference number counter value must be “32768 (D)”, and the difference number reaches such a value except for the borrow. The advantageous section will not be continued until.

On the other hand, as described above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
, The HL register value after the operation is “FFFD (H)”.
Here, “FFFD (H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
It is.

Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
And the D7 bit of the H register value becomes “1”.
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
When the difference counter is updated, the HL register value becomes “FFFF (H)”.

Here, “FFFF (H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
It is.
Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
And the D7 bit of the H register value becomes “1”.
Thus, when a borrow occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes “1”.

As described above, as a result of updating the difference counter, if no borrow has occurred, the D7 bit of the H register value is “0”, and if a borrow has occurred, the D7 bit of the H register value is “0”. 1 ".
Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, when determining whether the operation result is less than “0”, it is determined whether the D7 bit of the H register value is “1”. When the D7 bit of the H register value is “1”, it is determined that the operation result is less than “0”.
With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the calculation result is “0” without determining whether or not the carry flag is “1” as a result of the calculation.
Since it is determined whether or not the calculation result is “0” without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the payout number is added to the difference counter value after subtracting the bet number.

As is apparent from the above description, even if the maximum value “2414 (D)” that can be taken by the difference counter is not limited to the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the H register value, the D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also “0”.
On the other hand, when a carry of the difference counter value occurs, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value but also the D6 bit, the D5 bit, and the D4 bit become “1”.

Therefore, in FIG. 52, in step S441, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is “1”, it may be determined whether the D6 bit is “1”. , D5 bit is “1”, and whether the D4 bit is “1” may be determined. In any case, when the bit is “1”, the operation result is less than “0”, and when the bit is not “1”, the operation result is not less than “0”.
As is clear from the above, in the example 1 (step S431) of FIG. 51, the operation result is less than “0” with reference to the D7 bit (or D6, D5, or D4 bit) of the H register value. It is also possible to determine whether there is.

  As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference number counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether the advantageous section clear counter is “0” is determined. The determination (step S424), the determination whether the difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit value (step S434), and the initialization of the information regarding the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the bet number (specified number) in the current game. Will be executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit as a result of playing the game with the bet number (specified number) "2", the advantageous section ends. I do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 at a period of 2.235 ms (however, the time period is not limited) in parallel with the main processing.
When the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S451, in step S452, a process of saving the register value and prohibiting a duplicate interrupt is performed as an initial process. Here, in order to use the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Further, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. The reason for this is that, for example, an execution request for interrupt processing may be made during execution of power-off processing.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54 to be described later, and is a process of detecting whether or not a signal of a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. The interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process for subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed is mentioned.

Next, the process proceeds to step S456 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 55 described later, and is a process of turning on the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10.
The errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include a non-recoverable error and a recoverable error. For the non-recoverable error, an error display is output by the main processing (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41). The display of the error is performed by this LED display control every time the interruption process is performed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S457, in which the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, and the like have been operated, the switch signal, and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, rising data, The falling data is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).

  In the next step S458, it is determined whether the set value is within a normal range. Here, the set value data stored at the address “F000 (H)” is read, and the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5”). Judge) whether or not. When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and when it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process. In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and the fact that the error is “E6” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In step S459, a check process of a built-in random number is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the internal random number is provided, and it is determined whether this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when detecting an abnormal clock frequency of the random number for the lottery (for example, when the random number is updated slowly), the error flag is turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S460 to determine whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether or not the error flag is ON). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461, When it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process shifts to a non-recoverable error process. The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of the reels 31 (left, middle, and right), and includes a stop, a constant speed, an acceleration, a deceleration, a deceleration start, and a standby according to the operation state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S462, and a port output process is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the (for reel) motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, an input error check process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether there is any abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (a non-transmitted control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the interrupt processing after that point (in principle, when the command buffer is empty, in principle, the interrupt processing coming next to that point), this step S464 is executed. Transmits a control command to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S465, data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in the register. In the next step S466, an external signal is output from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33) (signal transmission to the external centralized terminal board 100).
Next, the process proceeds to step S467 to perform a ratio display preparation process. This process is a process for updating a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputting segment data, and the like.

  In the next step S468, a random number updating process is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step S469, where the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interruption is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the number of credits LED 76, the number of acquired LEDs 78, the state display LEDs 79 (79 a to 79 f), the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on / off by the interruption processing every 2.235 ms. Controlled.
Furthermore, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt processing, the transmission processing is performed.

Note that, during the non-recoverable error processing, the interrupt processing is not performed (the interrupt processing is interrupted until the normal recovery).
The non-recoverable error is a serious error that cannot occur normally, and executes processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from an input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80) and the like. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is prohibited.
If an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer when the unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 in FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal has been turned on in the previous interrupt processing. Here, when a voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value (in the example of FIG. 3, equal to or lower than V1), a predetermined input is performed by a voltage monitoring device (power cutoff detecting circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50. Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input. Further, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If it is determined in the previous interrupt process that the power-off detection signal is ON, the process proceeds to step S482, and if it is not, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal is on in the current interrupt processing. When it is determined that the switch is not turned on, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switch is on, the process proceeds to step S483.
When it is determined “Yes” in both steps S481 and S482 (when a power-off detection signal is input for two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that power-off has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all the output ports 52 are turned off. By this processing, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (during rotation of the reel 31) or the hopper motor 36 is being driven (during payout of medals), the driving is stopped.
Next, the process proceeds to step S484, and the power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process of storing data indicating that the normal power-off process has been executed in the RWM 53.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This processing is for calculating a checksum including a work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and the target program use area includes a program work area, an unused area, a stack area, and the like.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue the calculation of the checksum. On the other hand, if it is determined that the calculation of the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also referred to as complement data) that becomes “0” when all the data in the program use area and the value stored in the predetermined address are added at the time of the checksum of the RWM 53. ).
Then, when the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, the checksum data is added to all the data of the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as described above. If the calculated checksum data is "0", it is determined that the value is a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined that the value is an abnormal value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S488, where a reset wait state is set. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power cut-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, and in step S488, the state waits for output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, the output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process of outputting “00000000 (B)” from the output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, the output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting “00000000 (B)” from the output port 4 as in the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. This process updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter by right shifting one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is “0”. When it is determined that the LED display counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S495, and when it is determined that the LED display counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S496. .
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, a process of setting the LED display counter “00000000 (B)” to “00010000 (B)” is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S497 to acquire error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data. Here, in the storage area of the RWM 53, a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, and LED display data indicating on / off of a game start display LED 79d to a replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79 are stored. A storage area and (1-3) storage areas for storing bet display data indicating ON / OFF of the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: "1" when the game can be started, "0" when the game cannot be started
D4: "1" when a medal can be inserted, and "0" when a medal cannot be inserted.
D5: "1" when replay wins, "0" when no replay wins
D6: Not used D7: Not used Note that the D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

The bet display data is configured as follows.
0 bets: 00000 000
One bet: 00000001
When two bets: 000000011
When three bets are placed: 00000111
The D0 to D2 bits of the bet display data correspond to the segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.
Then, in a step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Further, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, an OR operation (synthesis) is performed on the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data), and the operation result is set as segment data for the output port 3. When an OR operation is performed on the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data), the result becomes data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is turned on or off. Then, when there is a display request for digit 5 (“Yes” in step S516), the segment data is output from output port 3.
Next, the process proceeds to step S499, and the register for setting the segment data for the output port 4 is cleared.

  In the next step S500, a value obtained by performing an AND operation on the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is determined. Judge. When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S501.

  In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table according to the present embodiment includes an LED segment table 1 that defines segment data for displaying an error number, and an LED segment table other than the error number (the number of credits, the number of payouts, the set value, the display during setting change, the pressing order). An LED segment table 2 that defines segment data for displaying the instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions is provided, and is stored in the use area of the ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the head address of the LED segment table 2 is read, and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, offset and segment data are defined in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501 as follows.
Offset "0": Segment data displaying "0" Offset "1": Segment data displaying "1" Offset "2": Segment data displaying "2" Offset "3": Displaying "3" Segment data offset “4”: Segment data displaying “4” Offset “5”: Segment data displaying “5” Offset “6”: Segment data displaying “6” Offset “7”: “7” Segment data to be displayed Offset “8”: Segment data to display “8” Offset “9”: Segment data to display “9” Offset “A”: Segment data to display “=” Offset “B”: “A” Segment data to display

For example, first, when the payout number data “10 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the payout number data is “1” and the lower digit offset is “0”. It becomes. Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "1" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "0" is obtained.
Also, for example, secondly, when the setting change display data “88 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the setting change display data is “8” and the lower digit is “8”. Is “8”. Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "8" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, for example, thirdly, when the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number is “A” and the lower digit of the lower order digit is “A”. The offset is “1”. Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "=" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "1" is obtained.
Further, for example, fourthly, when the designated number display data "0B (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset is "0" and the lower digit offset is "B". It becomes. Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "0" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "A" is obtained.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and first, set value data is obtained. Here, the set value data stored at the address “F000 (H)” is read and stored in the A register. Next, “1” is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is stored in the A register. The set value display data is an offset value when the set value is displayed.
As described later, the segment data stored at the address (of the LED segment table 1 or 2) obtained by adding the offset value to the head address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is obtained.
Next, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined whether or not there is a display request for a set value. Here, when the D register value is “00010000 (B)” and the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, it is determined that there is a display request for the set value. When it is determined that there is a display request for the set value, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, credit amount data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, an upper digit offset is obtained. In this process, an operation of dividing the credit amount data (A register value) acquired in step S504 by "10 (D)" is executed, the quotient value is stored in the A register, and the surplus value is stored in the E register. Processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the upper digit of the credit amount. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digit of the credit number, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S507, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the lower digit of the credit amount. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is “1”. If the D1 bit is “1”, “Yes” is determined, and the process proceeds to step S513. . On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number, the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S508, the acquired number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, in the acquired number data, the number-of-payouts data is stored at the timing when the medal is paid out based on the winning of the small role. At the timing of the setting change, the setting change display data “88 (H)” is stored. Furthermore, when it is the timing to specify the specified number, the specified specified number display data “0B (H)” is stored. Further, at the timing when the indicating function is activated (notifying the pressing order), the pressing order indicating number “= x (x = 1 to 6)” is stored. Then, any of these data is obtained and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not an error is displayed. In this process, the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497) is read, and it is determined whether or not the value is "0". If not, it is determined that an error is being displayed and step S510 is performed. If it is "0", it is determined that the error is not being displayed, and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for error display is set. The description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 is omitted. In step S510, a process of storing the head address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register is performed. Therefore, in this case, the head address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the head address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

  In the next step S511, an offset for the upper digit is obtained. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), an operation of dividing the B register value by "10 (D)" is executed, and the quotient is stored in the A register. Is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when the error is not being displayed (when the B register value is “0”), the A register value (payout number data, display data during setting change, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to “10 ( D) ", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

  In the next step S512, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 3a) of the D register value is “1”, and if it is “1”, it is determined that a display request has been made. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, an offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit value and the lower digit value are exchanged between the A register and the E register. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is obtained. In this processing, the data (the head address of the LED segment table 1 or 2) stored in the HL register and the data (offset value) stored in the A register are added, and the data corresponding to the added address (LED segment This is the process of storing the segment data (of Table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for the output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since the digits 1b to 4b perform the lighting process in the ratio display process (step S522) described later, the segment data of the digits 1b to 4b is not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, “Yes” (set value display request is issued) in step S503, and when the set value display segment data is acquired in step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

  Next, the flow advances to step S516 to determine whether there is a display request for digit 5. Here, the display request of digit 5 is made when the D register value is “00010000 (B)”. When it is determined that there is a display request for digit 5, the process proceeds to step S520, and when it is determined that there is no display request for digit 5, the process proceeds to step S517.

  In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as segment data for the output port 3. If "Yes" in step S516 (when there is a display request for digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for the output port 3.

  In the next step S518, the data of the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the value is “0”. If the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether or not the digit to be turned on in the current interrupt processing is the digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is “1”, it is determined that it is the lighting timing of the digit 4a. In this case, data obtained by performing an OR operation on the segment data set in step S517 and “10000000” is set as the segment data for the output port 3. As a result, data that can light the segment P (the advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S519, and the segment data for the output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. When there is no display request for digit 5 (when "No" in step S516), this is to prevent the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) from being turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S520, where a digit signal is output from the output port 2 and a segment signal is output from the output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as digit data of the output port 2 and output from the output port 2.
The segment signal data output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 is turned on) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 are turned on).

Next, proceeding to step S521, a segment signal is output from the output port 4. The segment signal data output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a setting value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no setting value display request). In other words, when the segment data for the output port 4 has been cleared in step S519, “00000000 (B)” is output from the output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522, and shifts to a ratio display process (a process for turning on the management information display LED 74). In the present embodiment, the description of the ratio display process is omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous section display LED 77 and the power-off (when the power-off occurs during the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77) will be described.
In the interrupt processing, if power interruption is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps. In this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power interruption.
Then, after the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is determined as “No” in step S208. The process proceeds to the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

  In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, and this range is an unused area of the RWM 53 as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag at the address “F062 (H)” is not targeted for initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter at the address “F051 (H)”.

In the power-off recovery processing of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 ends, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, the interrupt process of FIG. 53 is executed at an interval of 2.235 ms after step S262. When the interrupt processing is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. In addition, the case of “No” in step S512 is a case where there is a display request for the digit 4a. In this case, when the error is not displayed (“No” in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to “1” in step S518, and Data is output (step S520). Thereby, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
As described above, when the power is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, if the interrupt processing is executed in the power-off recovery processing, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
If the setting key switch is ON in the program start processing of FIG. 38, “Yes” is determined in the step S208, and the process shifts to the setting change processing (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of the step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range includes the advantageous section display LED flag at the address “F062 (H)”. When it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including the address “F062 (H)”) is initialized.

Therefore, by initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, even if “1” indicating lighting is stored up to that point, it becomes “0” indicating turning off.
Thereafter, an interrupt is activated in step S233 of FIG. When the interrupt is activated, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 when the lighting timing of the set value display LED 73 is reached in the LED display control (FIG. 55). Then, in FIG. 39, when the process proceeds to step S240, the set value can be changed (the set value is changed by turning on the setting change switch).

In FIG. 39, when the interrupt process is activated in step S233 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, even when the digit 4a is turned on, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is already set to “ Since it is “0”, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on and the process shifts to the setting change process, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. In addition, even if the setting change process ends and the process shifts to the main process, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

Also, in the main process of FIG. 41, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and if power is interrupted during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, during rotation of the reel 31, the following will occur. .
When the power interruption is detected in the interrupt processing, in step S483 in FIG. 54, all output ports 52 are turned off, so that the drive signal of the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) is also stopped by the power cut.

  Next, when power is supplied, the power returns to the state before the power was cut off via the power return process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. As a result, the same drive signal of the motor 32 as before the power was turned off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal of the motor 32 before the power is turned off is a signal for maintaining the constant speed state. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the motor 32 (reel 31) is driven at one step with one interruption (2.235 ms) in the constant speed state. However, even if a drive signal in a constant speed state is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after the drive is stopped, the motor 32 cannot be driven because the rotation torque is weak.

  Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (the index is not turned off). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a predetermined time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is re-accelerated (re-operated). For example, the acceleration of the motor 32 is, for example, one step drive at 20 interrupts (20 × 2.235 = 44.7 ms), one step drive at 16 interrupts, and one step drive at 12 interrupts,. This is a method in which one-step driving is gradually performed in a short time. The acceleration state requires, for example, about 100 steps. Thus, the rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on and the interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, the digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter. If the value is a value for lighting 3a ("00000100 (B)" in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)" after 4 interrupts from that point, and the digit 4a (the advantageous section display LED 77) is turned on. Timing is coming.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in the remaining "1" to several steps), and after the power is turned on. As described above, even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and re-acceleration is performed, at least several tens of interrupts are required until the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches the constant speed state. It costs.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters the constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. That is, when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

When the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are performed after the interruption is started until the reel sensor 33 determines that the reel 31 does not detect the index of the reel 31. Cost. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the motor 32 is re-accelerated.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up after the power is turned off and before the reel 31 spins again and returns to the constant speed state.

In the main process of FIG. 41, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, and in the medal payout process by winning in step S294, when the power is cut off while the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the following is performed. . Note that, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process by winning as shown in FIG. 49, in step S398, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and as shown in FIG. 7, when each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detects the movable piece 39a (see FIG. 8). , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. Then, the hopper motor 36 continues to be driven until it is determined that medals corresponding to the number of payouts have been paid out.
During the payout of medals, if power interruption is detected in the interrupt processing before all medals are paid out, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when power is supplied, the process returns to step S294 (medal payout process for winning) of the main process (FIG. 41) via the power return process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 40 described above. As a result, a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was turned off. As shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process for winning a prize in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when returning from the power-off, as described above, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (the advantageous section display LED 77) arrives within four interrupts.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required for paying out one medal cannot be determined unconditionally, but it takes about 100 ms. Accordingly, the process returns to the medal payout process by winning after the power is turned off, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the remaining medals are paid out. In other words, when the medal payout process by winning is completed after the return from the power-off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that time.

Further, as a method for preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off momentarily when the power supply is momentarily interrupted, the following method is exemplified.
As shown in FIG. 54, when the power-off is detected, the outputs of all the ports 52 are turned off in step S483. Is not output. Thus, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is the segment P of the digit 4a, is turned off.

Then, the process proceeds to step S488 in FIG. 54, and after waiting for reset, when the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, an ON signal of D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and Outputting an ON signal of D7 bits (segment P) from the output port 3 may be mentioned. In FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S488, and in the loop process after waiting for reset, no interrupt process occurs. Therefore, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is always lighting (static lighting). As a result, even if a momentary interruption occurs, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be visually prevented from turning off.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, a process of not turning off the output ports 2 and 3 but turning off the other output ports may be executed. Even with such control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off due to an instantaneous interruption.

  In this embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set as the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be configured by a separate and independent LED. Then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit, and even if power failure is detected, unless the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is prevented from being turned off during an instantaneous interruption. can do.

Next, the difference number display on the sub control board 80 will be described. The sub-control board 80 displays the difference number on the image display device 23 during the AT. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following storage areas are provided in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80.
Comprises:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Pull back flag 4) Pull back game number counter

The main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command corresponding to each game, on / off of the AT flag. Note that the command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 is turned on from off and from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives on / off information of the AT flag from the main control board 50 and turns on / off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores the fact that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 has been turned from off to on (rising data of the AT flag) and from off to on (falling data of the AT flag). .

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game number counter for each game during the AT, and terminates the AT when the AT game number counter becomes “0”. Further, when the difference number counter becomes “2400 (D)” or the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0”, the AT (and the advantageous section) ends.
When ending the AT and the advantageous section, the main control board 50 executes the initialization process of the difference counter. Therefore, when the next game is shifted to the normal section, the difference counter becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, the sub control board 80 includes a sub difference counter that counts the difference number during AT. The sub difference counter is "0" at the start of the AT (except for the case where the player wins the AT during the retraction period to be described later and starts the AT). Thereafter, the game and the difference number are updated. It should be noted that when a carry occurs, unlike the difference counter of the main control board 50, the carry is not corrected to "0" and the carry remains.

For example, when AT starts,
1st game: Non-winning of role (number of difference "-3")
2nd game: non-winning of the role (number of difference "-3")
Third game: Winning of the bell in the order of pushing (number of difference "+5")
4th game: non-winning of role (number of difference "-3")
Fifth game: Winning of the bell in the order of pressing (number of difference "+5")
Assume that
In this case, the sub difference number counter (2 byte counter)
1st game: 0 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
Second game: FFFD (H) -3 (H) = FFFA (H)
Third game: FFFA (H) +5 (H) = FFFF (H)
Fourth game: FFFF (H) -3 (H) = FFFC (H)
Fifth game: FFFC (H) +5 (H) = 0001 (H)
It will be updated.

At the time of the replay winning, the sub difference number counter is not updated like the difference number counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the game at the time of the replay winning, the number of payouts may be calculated by setting the number of payouts to “0” and setting the bet number of the next game (at the time of replay) to “0”.
Further, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization processing when ending the advantageous section, but the sub difference number counter of the sub-control means 80 sets the AT (advantage section) to In some cases, the initialization process is not immediately executed and the counting is not stopped even when the process is completed. The sub-control board 80 turns on (“1”) the pull-back flag when the AT is finished and the count of the sub difference counter is continued.

  The sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value at the end of the AT, and if the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, “2000 (D)”), the sub difference number counter Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds the predetermined value (or is equal to or more than the predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. In the case where the AT is terminated after the sub difference counter reaches the upper limit value and the AT is pulled back, the sub difference number counter value may reach the upper limit value immediately. Then, the difference number is not taken over to the next AT.

The pull-back flag is a flag for determining whether the AT has been pulled back within the predetermined number of games ("50" in this embodiment) after the end of the AT (whether or not a re-win has been achieved).
At the end of the AT, the withdrawal flag is turned on, and “50 (D)” is set in the withdrawal game number counter. The withdrawal game number counter is for counting the number of games after the end of the AT (during the withdrawal period). At the end of the AT, "50 (D)" is set in the pullback game number counter, and thereafter, if the AT has not been won, the game continues to subtract "1". When the number-of-withdrawals game counter becomes "0", the withdrawal of the AT has failed, the withdrawal flag is turned off, and the sub difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
Then, when the pull-back flag is ON after the end of the AT, the sub control board 80 updates the sub difference number counter.

Also, during the withdrawal period (when the withdrawal flag is ON), when a special role such as BB is won and a special game such as BB game is executed, the withdrawal game number counter is decremented (updated) during the special game. )do not do.
On the other hand, if the player wins the AT before the return game number counter reaches “0”, the AT is successfully returned, and in the subsequent AT, the number of images succeeding the previous AT difference is displayed.
For example,
The difference number at the first AT: +1000 sheets The difference number at the end of the first AT until the second AT is won: -100 sheets, the difference number at the start of the second AT is "+900 sheets". The image is displayed.

An upper limit value that can be counted by the sub difference counter is set. In the present embodiment, the following settings are made.
1) Upper limit during AT: 2414 (D)
2) The upper limit value when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped during the AT and the obtainable number (expected difference number) in the special game related to the special role is “250 (D)”: “2414 (D) ) -250 (D) = 2164 (D) "
3) Upper limit during withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds “2414 (D)” during AT, counting of the number of sub difference numbers is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In the present embodiment, the sub difference number counter value and the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 are linked (matched). For example, when the sub difference number counter becomes “1000 (D)” during AT, an image is displayed on the image display device 23 as “AT acquired number during AT: 1000”.

As described above, when the difference number counter of the main control board 50 exceeds “2400 (D)”, the AT (and the advantageous section) ends. Therefore, the maximum value that can be taken by the difference counter is “2414 (D)” as described above.
Therefore, the maximum value that can be counted for the sub difference number counter of the sub control board 80 is set to “2414 (D)” in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub difference number counter is “2414 (D)”, the maximum difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is “2414”. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessively large number of images from being displayed as an image, and to prevent an image display that remarkably arouses gambling.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (the ninth embodiment), when the number of obtainable BB games is 250, the player wins the BB during the AT and receives a symbol combination corresponding to the BB. Is stopped, the sub difference number counter value at that time is determined. When the sub difference counter value exceeds “2164 (D)”, the value exceeds “2414 (D)” at the end of the BB game, so that when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub difference is displayed. The number counter is cleared (2).

  In this case, the image display device 23 displays “congratulations”, “celebration”, or the like as an image display corresponding to the difference number. In this way, instead of displaying "congratulations" or the like already at the start of the BB game, the sub difference counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference count is not exceeded until the number exceeds "2414 (D)". The counter may be kept counting, and when it exceeds “2414 (D)”, the sub difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as “congratulations” may be displayed.

Furthermore, the difference number may increase during the pullback period. For example, there is a case where a difference is counted up as a result of winning a special combination during a retraction period and completing a special game.
In particular, if the specification is such that the player wins the AT when a specific BB is won, the game shifts to the AT after the end of the BB game. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, the upper limit value is reached immediately even if the difference number is taken over by the AT after the end of the BB game. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds “2000 (D)” during the retraction period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, during the AT withdrawal period, when the player wins the BB with AT and completes the BB game, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds “2000 (D)” at the end of the final game of the BB game, Clears the sub difference counter. As a result, in the AT after the end of BB, the display of the difference number starts from “0”.

  As described above, even if the game shifts to the special game during the withdrawal period, the withdrawal game number counter is not decremented during the special game. Then, when the special combination is won during the pullback period, the update of the sub difference number counter may be continued or interrupted during the special game. As an example of interrupting the updating, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the retraction period is “1000 (D)” and the BB with AT is won, the sub difference number counter value is set to “1000 (D)”. Stop at Then, even if "250" cards are obtained in the subsequent BB game, the "250" cards are not added to the sub difference counter. Therefore, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number starts from “1000”.

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub difference number counter, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the retraction period is “1000 (D)”, the BB with AT is won, and in the subsequent BB game, “ When the number of "250" has been acquired, the sub difference counter at the end of the BB game is "1250 (D)". Then, when shifting to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number is started from “1250”.
Further, in the case where the sub difference counter is continuously updated, for example, when the sub difference counter value is “1800 (D)” during the retraction period, the BB with AT is won, and “250” is obtained in the subsequent BB game. When the number of coins has been obtained, the sub difference counter at the end of the BB game is “2050 (D)”, which exceeds “2000 (D)”. Therefore, the sub difference counter is cleared before the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from “0” in the AT after the BB ends.

Further, the sub difference counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the bet number, but in the present embodiment, the difference of the game is limited only when the game is started with a predetermined specified number. Update the number.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the bet number of the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition for updating the sub difference number counter is defined as when the bet number (specified number) is “3”, and when the game is started with the bet number (specified number) “2”. Does not update the difference number in the game.

Next, the sub difference counter management process will be described with reference to a flowchart.
FIGS. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the sub difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG.
In step S531 in FIG. 56, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (whether or not the AT is currently being performed). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

  In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pull-back flag is on. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not on, the processing in this flowchart ends. That is, when the non-AT is in progress and the pullback flag is off, the sub difference counter is not updated.

  In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated to determine the bet number of the game, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command capable of determining the bet number of the game to the sub control board 80. If it is determined that the bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S534.

  In step S534, it is determined based on the received bet command whether or not the bet number (specified number) is “3”. When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub difference counter is updated only when the bet number is “3”. Therefore, even during the AT or during the withdrawal period, if the bet number is other than “3”, the sub difference counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 is updated irrespective of the bet number (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the bet number ("3") from the sub difference counter. Next, proceeding to step S536, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41, after the display determination is performed in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command capable of determining the number of payouts to the sub control board 80.
If it is determined in step S536 that the payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, where the sub control board 80 adds the payout number to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on. If it is determined that the switch is on, the process proceeds to step S539. If it is determined that the switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG.

  In the step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is turned on in the current game (whether or not the rising of the AT flag is turned on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in this game, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on (the rising of the AT flag is off) in this game, the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 at the time of the AT before the previous game.

  In step S540, sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pull-back flag is on. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S541, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not ON, the process according to this flowchart ends. For example, when the AT flag is turned on in this game ("Yes" in step S539) and the withdrawal flag is off ("No" in step S540, that is, when it is not during the withdrawal period), the sub difference number is set at this time. Since the counter is “0”, there is no need to update the sub difference number counter, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the retraction flag. In the next step S542, the sub-control board 80 clears the withdrawal game number counter. Here, “Yes” in step S539 and “Yes” in step S540 correspond to a case where the AT is won during the pullback period. Therefore, in this case, the withdrawal flag is turned off and the withdrawal game number counter is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S543, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit value of “2414 (D)”. When it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds “2414 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S546. Then, in a step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This may occur when the difference number increases during the retraction period after the end of the AT and the sub difference number counter exceeds “2414 (D)”.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S543 that the sub difference number counter does not exceed “2414 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub control board 80 stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. It is determined whether or not. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
“Yes” in this step S544 is a case where the BB with AT is won during the withdrawal period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed in the game that has won BB.
If it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and if it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has not been stopped and displayed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

  In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds “2164 (D)”. When it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds “2164 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the processing in this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S545 that the sub difference number counter has not exceeded “2164 (D)” (the sub difference number counter value is maintained), the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  As described above, when the BB game of this embodiment ends with payout exceeding 250 as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), the sub difference counter is set to “2164 (D)” at the start of the BB game. Is exceeded, the game will exceed “2414 (D)” (upper limit) by the last game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, at the time of starting the BB game (before the start), it is determined whether or not the sub difference counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game. Before the start, the sub difference number counter is cleared. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number is not displayed. For example, “congratulations” or “celebration” is displayed instead of the number display.

  If it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on, and the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. 57, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the AT flag has been turned off in the current game (whether the fall of the AT flag is on or not). That is, it is determined whether or not the AT has ended in the current game). If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned off in the current game, the process proceeds to step S548. If it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned off (the fall of the AT flag is off) in the current game, the process proceeds to step S551. .

  In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)”. If it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the flow proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not less than “2000 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pull-back flag. Next, proceeding to step S550, the sub-control board 80 sets an initial value “50 (D)” to the number-of-withdrawals game counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
If the sub difference number counter is smaller than "2000 (D)" at the end of the AT by the processing in steps S548 to S550 described above, the pull-back flag is turned on and the initial value of the number of pull-back games is "50 (D)". Is set. The reason why the initial value of the number of retraction games is set to “50 (D)” is that the AT retraction within 50 games is set as the consecutive ATs (the condition for transferring the sub difference number to the next AT). Therefore, the number of retraction games is not limited to “50 (D)”, but can be variously set, such as “30 (D)” or “100 (D)”, depending on the specification.
Further, if the sub difference counter is equal to or more than "2000 (D)" at the end of the AT, even if the AT is pulled back thereafter, the sub difference number counter may exceed the upper limit value during the AT after the retraction. In such a case, the withdrawal flag is not set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than “2000 (D)” and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. In other words, if the sub difference number counter is equal to or more than "2000 (D)" at the end of the AT, the sub difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the process subsequently shifts to AT.

When the process proceeds from step S547 to step S551, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in the BB operation (BB game). The information of the operation state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
If it is determined in step S551 that the BB operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pull-back flag is on. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the step S553, the number of return games counter is decremented by "1". In other words, during the withdrawal period, when the BB is in operation (during the BB game), the update (subtraction) processing of the withdrawal game number counter is not executed. Note that the invention is not limited thereto, and the number of the withdrawal game number counter may be decreased even during the BB game during the withdrawal period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the number-of-withdrawal-games counter has become “0”. When it is determined that the number-of-pull-back games counter is not “0”, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number-of-withdrawals game counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S555.

In step S555, the retraction flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared. If "Yes" in step S554, the withdrawal game number counter is "0", so the clearing of the withdrawal game number counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, if “No” is determined in step S560 described later, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, proceeding to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. As described above, when the withdrawal flag is off and the withdrawal game number counter is “0” (clear), the sub difference counter is cleared (set to “0”), and thereafter “0” is maintained until the start of AT. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB operation is being performed and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the final game during the BB operation (BB game). The determination as to whether or not the game is the final game of the BB game may be made by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the sub control board 80 side, or may be transmitted from the main control board 50. The determination may be made based on an incoming command.
When it is determined that the game is the final game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and when it is determined that the game is not the final game, the process according to the flowchart is ended.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the retraction flag is on. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S560, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference counter is less than "2000 (D)". If it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the flow proceeds to step S561, and the rewind game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Thereby, the BB game is executed when the withdrawal flag is on, and when the sub difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)” in the last game of the BB game, the BB game is again performed from the next game with the withdrawal period (50 games). ) Is newly set. That is, when the number of withdrawal games is set to the initial value “50” after the end of the AT, the BB game is executed during the withdrawal period, and the difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)” in the last game of BB game. , The number of withdrawal games is reset to “50”.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S560 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S555. After step S555, the withdrawal flag is turned off, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. Thereby, the withdrawal period ends. As described above, in the final game of the BB game, when the payback period is during, the sub difference number at that time is determined, and when the sub difference number is “2000 (D)” or more, the payback period ends. .

In the above-described sub difference counter management, the sub difference counter is updated at the timing when the bet command is received. That is, the sub difference number is updated before all the reels 31 stop. On the other hand, since the difference number counter is executed in the advantageous section counter management of the game end check processing, the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all the reels 31 have stopped.
Therefore, as for the sub difference number counter, similarly to the difference number counter, after the reels 31 are stopped, the subtraction of the bet number and the addition of the payout number may be executed.

Further, even if the difference number at the end of the game is negative (even if a digit is borrowed), the sub difference number counter stores the value (a value with a borrow). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the case of the difference number counter, when the sub difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a digit borrow occurs), it may be corrected to “0”.
Furthermore, even if the specification is such that the sub difference number counter may be negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number “0”.

In this case, the following processing may be performed.
As described above, the sub difference counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit is “2414 (D)”, that is, “096E (H)”. Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is “0 (H)”. Therefore, by determining whether or not the value of the most significant digit is “0 (H)”, it is possible to determine whether or not a digit borrow has occurred. Then, when it is determined that the carry-down has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not “0 (H)”), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 may be set to “0”.

  Further, in the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)) can be similarly applied. The sub bonus sets the number of games, the number of payouts, or the number of difference as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether the sub-bonus symbol has been stopped and displayed. In step S551, it is determined whether or not a sub bonus game is being played. Furthermore, in a step S558, it is determined whether or not it is the last game of the sub bonus game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Subsequently, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a prescribed number (the number of bets) is instructed before starting the game.
The display of the pressing order instruction information is an operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). Here, the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not the operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, the invention is not limited to this, and the specified number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the accessory condition apparatus, the prescribed number for each RT, and the number of winnings in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58 (A), BB1 and BB2 are provided as the accessory condition apparatus (special combination). When the player wins BB1 and stops the symbol combination corresponding to BB1, the game shifts to BB1 game. The BB1 game ends with a payout exceeding 100 cards. After the end of the BB1 game, the game shifts to non-RT.
When BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops, the game shifts to BB2 game. The BB2 game ends with payout exceeding 30 cards. After the end of the BB2 game, the game shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, during BB1, and during BB2.
The non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If the player wins BB1 in the non-RT, the game moves to the inside of BB1. If the player wins BB2, the game moves to the inside of BB2.
During the inside of BB1, it continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped inside BB1, the operation shifts to BB1 operation, that is, BB1 game. Similarly, the inside of BB2 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, the process moves to BB2 operation, that is, to BB2 game.
In addition, the special role that can carry over the winning is limited to one. Therefore, BB2 does not win when the player is inside BB1. Similarly, when inside BB2, BB1 is not won.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the specified number is limited to “3” during the operation of BB1 and the operation of BB2 (at the time of operating the accessory). The game cannot be started with the bet number “1” or “2”.
On the other hand, the prescribed numbers in the non-RT, inside BB1, and inside BB2 when the accessory is not operating are “2” or “3”. As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is either “2” or “3”.
In FIG. 58 (C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is “65536”. For example, the winning probability of the winning number “1” (normal replay) in non-RT is “9000/65536”. The number of advantageous section lotteries indicates the number when the denominator is “16384”. Therefore, when the number of advantageous section lotteries is “16384”, it means that the winning section is won with a probability of “16384/16384”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), in the non-RT, BB2 is randomly selected for the specified number “2”, but BB1 is not randomly selected. Conversely, when the specified number is “3”, BB1 is selected, but BB2 is not selected.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the specified number of non-RTs is “3” or the specified number in the BB2 is “3”, lottery of an advantageous section is possible. Then, in the lottery of the advantageous section, it is set so as to be always won in the advantageous section except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section almost an advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment has the above-described “7P” type specification.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game proceeds inside the BB2 and with the specified number “3”. Then, the AT is randomly selected in the BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2 that has won the election will not be awarded.
For example, if it is a non-RT at the present time, it is necessary to move from the non-RT to the inside of the BB2 (to win the BB2 in the non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play a game with a prescribed number “2”.
Therefore, in the case of non-RT at the present time, the player plays the game with the specified number “2”, wins BB2, and shifts to the inside of BB2 from the next game. Furthermore, since the lottery of the advantageous section is received inside the BB2 when the specified number is "3", the game proceeds with the specified number "3" inside the BB2.

Also, BB2 won with the specified number "2" cannot stop and display the symbol combination unless the specified number is "2". Similarly, the BB1 won with the specified number “3” cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the activated line unless the specified number is “3”.
For this reason, in non-RT, the player wins BB2 with the specified number “2”, moves to the inside of BB2, and progresses the game with the specified number “3”. Is not stopped and displayed on the activated line.
As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role is stopped, the game is shifted to the special game, and the medal is increased in the special game. , In other words, to create the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58C, in non-RT, it is possible to win BB2 with a probability of about “１ ／”, so that it is possible to move from non-RT to the inside of BB2 at an early stage.
Also, within the BB2, when a small combination or a replay is won, the advantageous section is won with a probability of 100%. Therefore, most of the game period is an advantageous section inside BB2. It is of course possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous section to less than 100%.

  Further, the instruction function can be activated (the processing relating to the instruction function is executed) only when the game is played with one specified number, in particular, in this embodiment, the specified number “3”. Therefore, when the player wins the AT during the advantageous section in the inside of the BB2 and the AT is executed, when the player starts the game with the specified number “3” and wins the pushing order bell, the instruction function is activated. , Is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (the number of bets) “2” during the AT, the instruction function is not activated even when the pressing order bell is won.

Further, similarly to the eleventh embodiment, even when the game is played with the specified number “2” during the AT, the difference counter is updated based on the bet number and the payout number in the game, and Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) is not updated. On the other hand, when the game is played with the specified number “3” during the AT, the difference number counter, the advantageous section clear counter, and the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) are used. Update about everything.
Regardless of the specified number, the RT always shifts when the shift condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination satisfying the shift condition is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, with respect to the main game state (usually, CZ, AT, etc.), any prescribed number may be set so as to enable transition, or the game is played with one prescribed number (for example, “3”). May be set to be transferable only when the

  In the inside of BB2, when the player starts a game with a specified number of "2" due to a player's operation error and the winning combination is not won in the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 which has been won can be stopped and displayed. It becomes. On the other hand, if a player starts a game with the prescribed number of “2” due to an operation error of the player and one of the roles is won in the game, the winning of the role won in the game is given priority, The symbol combination corresponding to BB2 having the winning is not stopped and displayed. However, when the player wins the replay in the game, the next game will also be played with the bet number “2”, so in the next game, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning BB2 is stopped and displayed. there is a possibility.

  If the game is started with the specified number “2” in the inside of the BB2 and in the AT and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game is finished, the process shifts to non-RT (AT). Then, in the non-RT, information corresponding to the specified number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the player is notified that the game should be performed with the specified number “2” (instruction of the specified number). . This is to allow the player to play the game with the prescribed number “2”, win the BB2, and shift the inside of the BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the specified number “2” is designated until BB2 is won.

  As described above, when information corresponding to the specified number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, “0A” is displayed. Note that the instruction of the prescribed number “2” is not limited to “0A”, and other indications may be made unless confused with any of the number of payouts, the setting change display “88”, the error number, and the pressing order instruction information. It may be. For example, since the maximum number of medals displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is “15”, for example, “22” may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number “2”.

In the present embodiment, the specified number is specified only during the AT, and the specified number is not specified during the non-AT. For example, after the BB2 game ends, if the game shifts to non-RT, and if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not specified. Therefore, in this case, at the discretion of the player, it is necessary to play the game by the specified number “2” and shift to the inside of the BB2.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of non-RT and non-advantaged sections, if the player plays the game with the specified number “3” and wins the small role or replay, the user also wins the advantageous section. Then, when a non-RT and advantageous section is reached, the specified number “2” may be specified (even if the section is a non-AT).
Further, the present invention is not limited to the above, and when shifting to non-RT, the specified number “2” may be indicated regardless of AT / non-AT and advantageous section / non- advantageous section.

  Further, in non-RT, when the player sets the bet number to “2”, the specified number may not be specified, and when the player sets the bet number to “3”, the specified number may be specified. In the main process of FIG. 41, the bet number is determined in the medal management process of step S276. If the current bet number is determined to be “2”, the specified number “2” is not specified. (Execution of the acquisition number data clearing process). When the current bet number is "3", the specified number "2" can be instructed (the designated specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data). No.

  In addition, when the BB2 game ends and the game shifts to non-RT, a wait process may be executed at the end of the final BB2 game. During this wait processing, the game cannot proceed (the main processing shown in FIG. 41). For this reason, after the wait process is completed, the process proceeds to a game start set process of the next game (non-RT), where a specified number is specified.

In the non-RT during the AT, the instruction of the specified number “2” is continued until BB2 is won. Therefore, the game may be completed in one game or may be performed in a plurality of games.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when a game is played with the specified number “2” in non-RT, a replay (normal replay, watermelon replay, cherry replay) may be won. As a result of playing the game with the specified number “2”, when the player wins the replay, whether or not to specify the specified number “2” in the next game is optional. For non-RT and AT, a specified number “2” may be instructed before the game starts, regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped until winning BB2. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (the number of bets) in the next game (re-game), and therefore does not indicate the specified number in the game. It may be.

The same applies to a case where a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed as a result of playing a game with the specified number “3” in a non-RT and AT, for example. In the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (the bet number), so that the specified number may not be specified in this case as well. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the specified number “2” may be instructed for the purpose of alerting.
In the non-RT and AT, when the game is performed with the specified number "2" and the player wins BB2 and shifts from the next game to inside the BB2, the specified number of instructions are thereafter provided unless the game is shifted to the non-RT again. Is not performed.

  The timing of instructing the prescribed number is after all reels 31 are stopped, and when there is a payout based on the winning of the small role, after the payout processing is completed, and the start switch 41 of the next game is operated. Before (for example, before a medal can be bet (before accepting a bet)). Therefore, after the payout based on the winning of the small role in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number “2” is instructed before the start of the game of the next game (non-RT). As shown in FIG. 42 (eleventh embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), when the game is non-RT and AT, the main control board 50 sets a specified number of instruction conditions. Judge that it is satisfied.

If it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the specified number of instruction conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and the acquired number data includes “0B” as specified instruction number display data corresponding to the specified instruction number “2”. (H) "is stored.
Thus, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of turning on the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78), in the instruction specified number display data “0B (H)”, the upper digit is set in step S511. The use offset “0 (H)” is obtained, and in step S514, segment data indicating “0” is obtained based on the LED segment table 2. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "0" is displayed on the digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

  At the timing of turning on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the lower digit offset “B (H)” of the designated number display data “0B (H)” is acquired in step S513, In step S514, segment data indicating "A" is obtained based on the LED segment table 2. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "A" is displayed on the digit 4a (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start set process of step S272 is a process before the bet is enabled and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the prescribed number of instructions is displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42, after storing the designated instruction number display data as the acquired number data in step S322, the automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when instructing the specified number in the next game at the time of the replay winning, the specified number is instructed before the automatic bet. As a result, the specified number can be promptly instructed to the player.
In FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquired number data (designated instruction number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing after step S280, “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

  Here, information “0A” corresponding to the specified instruction number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the specified number “2”, the instruction function is performed even during the AT. Does not work. In other words, even when the pushing order bell is won in the game, the pushing order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This is because, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the specified number “3”. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information “0A” corresponding to the specified instruction number “2” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the acquisition number display LED 78 at least until all the reels 31 are stopped. Is "00".

  On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information “0A” corresponding to the specified instruction number “2” was displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the game was played with the specified number “3”, and the push-bell was won. If so, the pressing order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This processing is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the acquired number display LED 78 displays information “0A” corresponding to the specified instruction number “2” before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the specified number “3”), “ After "00" is displayed, if the pushing order bell is won, pushing order instruction information (for example, "= 1") is displayed.

In addition, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels stop) in FIG. Since the acquired number data has been cleared in step S280 after the start switch 41 is operated, the process of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which the pressing order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Then, when the small role wins and the medal payout process by winning is executed in step S294, the obtained number data is incremented by "1", and accordingly, the obtained number is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 accordingly. You.

  Then, when the process proceeds to the game start set process in step S272 of the next game, if the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, information corresponding to the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 as described above. When displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, the specified number of display data is stored as acquired number data. At this time, the number of paid out games of the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, before storing the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, the acquired number data may be cleared. For example, in FIG. 42, before step S311, a process of clearing the acquired number data is executed.

In the AT and the non-RT, even though the specified number "2" is indicated, the game is executed with the specified number "3" by ignoring the specified number "2", winning the BB1, winning the inside of the BB1, Further, it is conceivable to execute the BB1 game.
In order to suppress such an action, for example, the process related to the instruction function is not executed inside the BB1. Further, in the BB1 game, the payout rate is set to be less than “1” so that the medal cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
It is to be noted that since the specified number of games to be played is up to the player, even if the specified number of games is played with the specified number of "3" in the AT and non-RT, even if the player plays the game with the specified number of "3", No penalty will be imposed on the person.

In the above example, when the specified number is indicated, the example in which the specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side) is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to displaying the number on the number display LED 78, the specified number of instructions may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing when displaying the specified number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is set to be substantially the same as the display start timing for displaying the specified number of instructions on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the game starts). Can be
Furthermore, the display end timing after displaying the specified instruction number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the display end timing after displaying the specified instruction number on the acquired number display LED 78.
The display end timing after displaying the specified instruction number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is as follows.
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all the reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in the specified number of games "2" (4) All the reels in the specified number of games "2" (5) After winning the BB2 in the game of the specified number "2" (6) When the reels 31 are stopped in the game of the specified number "2" and the game won in the BB2.
When the designated number of instructions is displayed on the dedicated display, the designated number of instructions can be continuously displayed on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are each three.
On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are each four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an outline of a configuration including a reel 31 (31A to 31D) and a stop switch 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31 </ b> A to 31 </ b> D are shown so as not to be blocked by the front surface of the front door 12. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown so as to be seen. In the right side view, the illustration of the medal insertion slot 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front surface of the front door 12, and the operation buttons 24 and the medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation buttons 24 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80, and are capable of bidirectional communication with the sub-control board 80. For example, at least a part of the operation button 24 is formed so as to be lit, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by controlling the sub-control board 80. When the operation button 24 is operated, the signal is input to the sub-control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are provided below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a vertical line passing through an intermediate point between the four reels 31A to 31D is defined as a line L1 (center line). The line L1 is located at an intermediate position between the reels 31B and 31C. The distance between the reels 31A and 31B, the distance between the reels 31B and 31C, and the distance between the reels 31C and 31D are all W1 (uniform). Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged symmetrically with respect to the line L1.
Regarding the four stop switches 42A to 42D, W2 (uniform) is provided between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D. The switch L is arranged so that the line L1 passes through an intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

The gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2 = W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2> W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2 <W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is referred to as a line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is referred to as a line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is disposed on the right side (closer to the center) of the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is disposed on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L3.

Further, in the front view, assuming that the interval (center-to-center distance) between the reels 31 is W3, the distance between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D is W3 (constant). It is.
When the interval (center-to-center distance) between the stop switches 42 is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D are all W4 (constant). ).

Further, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operation part) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged so as to intersect with the line L2. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the spherical body (operation portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be disposed on the left side (outward) of the line L2 without intersecting with the line L2, or may be disposed on the line L2 without intersecting with the line L2. May be arranged on the right side (near the center).
In the front view, the medal insertion slot 47 is arranged so that the medal insertion slot 47 intersects the line L4. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the medal insertion slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to intersect with the line L4. Alternatively, the medal insertion slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (close to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed horizontally long, and a line that contacts the left end of the operation button 24 is a line L4, and a line that contacts the right end of the operation button 24 is a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged such that a part of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

  As shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by stamping, printing, or the like, and has an arrow shape pointing toward the stop switch 42 in the example of FIG. Further, the left index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it may be slightly shifted from the center line). The right index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it may be slightly shifted from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated using the right index 12d as a guide.

When the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are three, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), a pressing order of “3! = 6” can be provided at the maximum. On the other hand, when the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are four, a pressing order of “4! = 24” can be provided at the maximum.
Then, as the number of pressing orders of the stop switch 42 is larger, the number of bases during the non-AT (the number of outs per 100 ins when the accessory is not operating and during the non-ATs). In the case of 50 out-numbers, it becomes the base 50.).

  Assuming that the number of the reels 31 and the stop switches 42 is 4, the pressing order bells to be drawn are 1234 bells (the stop switches 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicate the correct pressing order), 1243 bells,. , 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. Then, as shown in FIG. 58, assuming that the number of hits of each push order bell is the same, the number of hits of each push order bell is set to “1500”. In this way, the number of hits of each pushing order bell can be set to “１ ／”, so that the probability that the pushing order operated by the player matches the correct pushing order at the time of pushing order bell winning is reduced. can do.

Here, when the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are three, an image such as “123” or “left center right” can be displayed during the AT. For this reason, it is easy to intuitively understand the correct answer pressing order.
On the other hand, when the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be used for notifying the correct push order during the AT.

  For example, as a first method, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, to notify the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated. Can be For example, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is in the order of the stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, "3412" is notified (at least one of image display, sound display, and lamp color notification). ). Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "A", "B", "C", and "D", respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" is notified.

As a second method, a color for identification is given to the base of the reel 31 and / or the stop switch 42.
For example, the base of the reel 31A and / or the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the base of the reel 31B and / or the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the base of the reel 31C and / or the color of the stop switch 42C are yellow, The base of the reel 31D and / or the color of the stop switch 42D are set to red (different colors). Then, in the above example, instead of the notification “3412”, a notification “yellow red white blue” (at least one of image display, display by sound, and notification by lamp color) may be given.

Furthermore, as a third method, of the stop switches 42 to be operated from the first to the fourth, the image corresponding to the fourth (last) stop switch 42 to be operated is darkly displayed (or concealed). Is mentioned. In this case, "the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first> the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second ≧ the stop switch 42 to be operated third" Image brightness ≧ the image brightness corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourthly ”.
When the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or concealed), and the image corresponding to the fourth stop switch 42 is operated. The brightness of the image to be changed is set to be substantially the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when an image is notified of the pressing order of “3412” as in the above example, “3 · 12” is first displayed as an image. Note that “●” is an image corresponding to the “4” -th pressing order, and may be darkened (concealed) so that the character “4” is not visible at all, or “4”. The characters may be dimly identifiable.

When the image is displayed as “3 ● 12”, the image is displayed in the same manner as when 6 is selected, so that the player can easily and intuitively understand the pressing order. Then, when the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following 1) to 3) is executed.
1) "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to the display of "●", and the previous "●" is changed to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as “34 ● 2”.
2) Change “1” corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to display such as “−” or “「 ”, and change“ ● ”to“ 4 ”. Specifically, the image is displayed as “34-2” or “34 ○ 2”.
3) Change “1” corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image) and change “●” to “4”. Specifically, the image is displayed as “34 * 2” (“*” means blank).

Also, after the second stop, images may be displayed as "34 ●●", "34--", "34OO", and "34 **" in the same manner as described above.
Further, after the third stop, images may be displayed as “● 4 ●●”, “−4−−”, “○ 4OO”, and “* 4 **”.
Alternatively, after the third stop, the image itself in the pressing order may be deleted.
Even when all the pressing orders are displayed as “4312” as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. Is preferably deleted as in the above 1) to 3), since the operated stop switch 42 is easy to understand. Specifically, after displaying the image “4312”, “43 ● 2” (after operating the stop switch 42C) → “43 ●●” (after operating the stop switch 42D) → “4 ●●●” (stop switch 42B) (After operation) and image display (“●” may be “○”, “−”, or “*” as described above).

Furthermore, as a fourth method, there is a method of notifying the pressing order using four-character idioms. For example, when the push order is notified using “spring, summer, autumn and winter” as one of the four-character idioms, the correct answer order is “spring → summer → fall → winter”.
When the pressing order is “3412” as described above, notification of “autumn / winter / spring / summer” (image display, voice display) is given as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, an image is displayed as "Autumn-Spring-Summer" before the first stop, and an image is displayed as "Autumn-Winter-Summer" after the first stop.
In any of the first to fourth methods, when a pressing order error occurs on the way, the image in the pressing order may be kept displayed as it is, or at the time when the pressing order error occurs. The image may be deleted.

  Note that, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the 24-selection push order bell is provided as described above, 24 types of the push order instruction number and the push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the push order instruction information is “A1” to “A9”, “AA”, “AC”, “AF”, “F1” to “F9”, “FA”, “FC”, “FF”, 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and for example, various modifications as described below are possible.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In a non-advantaged section, a lottery in an advantageous section is performed only when the result of the lottery is the target lottery result. As described above, when the winning combination lottery result is non-winning (when the condition device does not operate as a result of the internal lottery) as described above, the advantageous section shift lottery, which is processing relating to the advantageous section, is performed. This is because it was considered that it is preferable not to perform it. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set in this way, and the advantageous section shift lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process is executed after the advantageous section shift lottery. Here, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) determined to be an advantageous section is always provided, and when the winning lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section shifting process (FIG. 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section shifting lottery. May be. Similarly, the combination lottery result (winning number) always determined to the AT is provided, and when the combination lottery result is obtained, the AT lottery is not executed and the AT set processing (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed. May be executed.
Further, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) determined to be an advantageous section and AT is always provided. When the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition processing and the AT lottery processing are not executed and the advantageous section transition processing and AT setting processing may be performed.
In addition, in the case where a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is not won in the advantageous section shifting lottery is provided, the advantageous section shifting lottery may be executed even when the result of the winning lottery is obtained. In this case, the winning number of the advantageous section may be set to “0”.

(3) When the player wins the AT, the initial game number of the AT is determined, and the number of the games is stored in the AT game number counter. When the AT game number counter becomes “0”, the AT is ended. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management type AT, but may be a difference number management type AT. In the case of the difference number management type AT, at the time of the AT winning, the initial value of the difference number that can be obtained is determined and stored in an AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, every time a payout is made, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter. When the AT difference number counter becomes “0”, the AT ends.
Also in the case of such a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is decremented when the number is one specified number (for example, “3”). Do not decrement the difference counter.

  (4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting change is possible after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the power is turned off, when the process shifts to the setting change process, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off before the setting can be changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the state in which the setting can be changed ends (after “Yes” in step S242 in FIG. 39), the advantageous section display is performed before the process proceeds to the main process (before step S248). A clear (initialization) process of the LED flag may be executed. In this way, it is possible to control the advantageous section display LED 77 to turn off after the set value is determined.

(5) Each of the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter is provided one by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and two difference number counters (important counters) may be provided to check the consistency.
For example, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided as advantageous section clear counters. During the advantageous section, both the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are updated each time the game is consumed. For example, in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the determination in step S424, the determination is made on the first advantageous section clear counter. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", it is determined whether the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0" or the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear. It is determined whether or not the counter and the counter have the same value. If it is determined that the values are “0” or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
A first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided as difference counters. Then, each time the game is completed, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated. In addition, for example, in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the determination in step S434, the determination is made on the first difference counter. If it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, it is determined whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit, or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. Judge. If it is determined that the value exceeds the upper limit or is the same, the process proceeds to step S435.

As described above, if the advantageous section clear counter value and / or the difference number counter value are determined, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (incorrect value) due to the influence of noise or the like, the advantageous section clear counter value is obtained. Is greater than or equal to “0” and / or whether the difference counter value exceeds the upper limit value.
If the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and the second difference counter do not match, for example, an error message is displayed to advance the game. (Main processing) is stopped.

  (6) In the sub difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has been stopped and displayed, and the flow advances to step S545 to determine that the sub difference number counter has exceeded “2164 (D)”. When the sub difference counter is cleared, the BB game may output a special effect different from the normal BB game. The special effect during the BB game can indicate to the player that the sub difference number counter has been cleared.

  When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub difference counter is not determined. In the BB game, the sub difference counter is set to, for example, "2000 (D)" (an example of a threshold value. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number has exceeded. When it is determined that the sub difference counter has exceeded “2000 (D)”, the sub difference counter is cleared and a special effect (an effect indicating that the sub difference counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. May be output.

  Furthermore, in the above case, if a power failure occurs in a game in which the sub difference counter in the BB game exceeds “2000 (D)” (a special effect has not been output yet), the power returns from the power failure. The special effect may be output from the played game. In this case, when returning from the power-off, it is sufficient to read the sub difference number counter value and the fact that the BB game is being performed, and determine whether or not to output a special effect.

  Further, when the power supply interruption occurs during the rotation of the game reel 31 of the game in which the sub difference number counter in the BB game exceeds “2000 (D)”, even if the special effect is output from the game recovered from the power supply interruption. Good. Therefore, in this case, if the power is not turned off, a special effect is output from the next game, but if the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating, the special effect is output from the game. Become.

  (7) The player plays the game with the specified number “2” during the AT (the instruction function does not operate when the specified number is “2”), wins the pressing order bell, and the stop switch 42 is operated by chance in the correct answer pressing order. If there is a small part payout and the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", an effect indicating the end of the AT, such as displaying an image such as "END", may be output at the end of the game. preferable. This is to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct answer pressing order is not notified and giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  (8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct answer pressing order is not notified, for example, when the player plays the game with the specified number “2”, the player wins the pushing order bell. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the payout number of the game is set to “2” or less (the difference number of the game is “0” or less) so that the AT does not end in the game. May be.

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub difference number counter continued counting even during the BB game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the player wins the BB during the AT and shifts to the BB game, the sub difference counter may not be updated (the updating of the sub difference counter is interrupted during the BB game). .
In this case, for example, in FIG. 56, before step S531, it is determined whether or not the BB operation is being performed (determined by the operation state flag). When the BB operation is being performed, the processing according to the present flowchart ends.
When the sub difference counter is not updated during the BB game, the processing in steps S551 and S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 becomes unnecessary. If “No” in the step S547, the process proceeds to a step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) In the same manner as the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when a lottery of a winning combination is not won, a shift lottery of an advantageous section (processing related to an advantageous section) is not executed. As described above, the rules are considered. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into consideration, the shift lottery of the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the shift lottery of the advantageous section (the processing relating to the advantageous section) is performed in only one specified number (the specified number “3” in the example of FIG. 58) in one game state (RT). I did it. This is done in consideration of the rule that the transition lottery of the advantageous section (the processing relating to the advantageous section) is determined to be only one specified number in one game state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, the shift lottery of the advantageous section may be executed with a plurality of specified numbers in one game state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number “2” is designated for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the last game of the AT game, it is not necessary to indicate the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that a game is played inside BB2, and that BB2 wins and shifts to BB2 game is irregular. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specification may be such that after the AT is executed inside the BB2, when the termination condition of the AT is satisfied, the BB2 is won and the BB2 game is executed. In this case, when the end condition of the AT is satisfied inside the BB2, after the end of the game that satisfies the end condition of the AT (after the reels 31 are stopped and the payout process is executed at the time of the small win), Prior to the start of the next game (non-AT) (before betting is possible), a prescribed number “2” is instructed to urge BB2 to win. In the twelfth embodiment, the BB2 is won with the specified number “2”, so the specified number for winning the BB2 is “2”. For example, when the BB to be won with the specified number “1” is provided. In order to win the BB, the specified number "1" is designated.
Further, the BB game in the case of such specifications may be a BB game in which medals increase or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When instructing the prescribed number, it was executed in the game start set processing (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is determined whether or not the game is the last game of the BB2 game. If the game is the last game, the specified number of the next game is specified in the game end check processing. However, when the small role wins in the final game of the BB2 game, there is a payout, and when the number of payouts is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the specified number is indicated after the display of the number of payouts. If the LED indicating the specified number is a dedicated LED, the dedicated LED can indicate the specified number of the next game while the payout number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the freeze is executed in the final game of the BB2 game, when the specified number of the next game is indicated at the end of the game, any timing before the execution of the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze It may be.

  (5) As in the twelfth embodiment, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed when the game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers. For example, in a game in an advantageous section, in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number "3" (for example, in the case of inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is set to a special 3 bet. It may be set to a button. In other words, if the number of credits is “3” and it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number “3” during the advantageous section and the three-bet switch 40b is operated, the bet “3” is set. I do. On the other hand, if the number of credits is “2” and it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number “3” during the advantageous section and the “3” bet switch 40b is operated, “2” is not bet. Set as follows.

  Alternatively, even if it is possible to play a game with the prescribed number “3”, if the number of credits is “2”, operating the 3-bet switch 40b will set “2” bet. Is also good. In particular, in FIG. 58, it is preferable that the non-RT and AT be set so that if the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" is bet.

(6) As in the twelfth embodiment, when most of the game sections are set as the advantageous sections, the instruction function can be activated at an arbitrary timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from the difference number counter) capable of counting minus the difference number is provided, and the payout rate in a predetermined period is calculated. When the payout rate in a predetermined period has reached a predetermined lower limit value (for example, the predetermined lower limit value is set higher than the lower limit value in the regulation), the instruction function is activated to increase the payout rate. Is also good. When the payout rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the instruction function ends.
Activating the indicating function when the predetermined lower limit value is reached may be included in “AT” or may not be included in “AT”. However, since the operation of the instruction function is still the same, it corresponds to the processing related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is the acquired number display LED 78. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to another existing LED, or a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions may be separately provided.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is separately provided, even if the start switch 41 is operated after the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is displayed in the game start set process, the specified number of specified LEDs is displayed. May not be deleted. Further, even if all the reels 31 are stopped, a small win is won, and medals are paid out, the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions does not have to be erased.
In addition, when a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is provided, the specified number is specified in an arbitrary display mode because the specified number of instructions is not confused with the number of payouts, the error number, and the like. Can be. For example, if the prescribed number of instructions is “2”, “2” can be displayed.

  (8) In the twelfth embodiment, the example in which the specified number “2” is indicated has been given. However, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the specified number “1” may be specified or the specified number “3” may be specified. Conceivable. If the specification has a possibility of indicating any of the specified numbers “1” to “3”, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 when indicating the specified number “1” is “A1”, and the specified number is indicated. The display indicating “2” is “A2”, and the display indicating the specified number “3” is “A3”.

C. Thirteenth Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 is set so as to pass through the center of the four reels 31 and pass through the center of the four stop switches 42. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the four stop switches 42 as a whole may be arranged on the right side of the position in FIG. 58, and may be arranged so that, for example, a part of the stop switch 42B intersects the line L1. Conversely, the four stop switches 42 may be entirely shifted leftward from the position in FIG. 58, and may be arranged so that, for example, a part of the stop switches 42C intersects the line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but these Roman numeral portions may be used as lamps. In this case, for example, when the stop switch to be operated next is 42C, the lamp of the Roman numeral "3" is turned on.
Also, different colors may be assigned to the ranges in which Roman numerals from “1” to “4” are written, and colors corresponding to Roman numerals “1” to “4” may be assigned to the stop switches 42A to 42D. No. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numeral “1” is white, the range of Roman numeral “2” is blue, the range of Roman numeral “3” is yellow, and the range of Roman numeral “4” is red. Can be

  (3) A portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be configured by the image display device 23. Then, a different color is assigned to each stop switch 42 as described above. In this case, for example, when the stop switch 42B (blue) is designated at the time of notification of the pressing order, the periphery of the reel 31B emits blue light.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

  (5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a pressing order of a maximum of 24 selections can be provided as the pressing order bell. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a first stop pushing order bell. Here, in the related art, the first stop pushing order bell has three options. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, four selections can be set. When displaying the correct answer pressing order as an image at the time of winning the first stop pressing order bell, for example, if the stop switch 42 which is the correct answer is the stop switch 42C, the image display may be "XX1X".

  Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and a second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set as a stop switch 42C, the second stop is set as a stop switch 42A, and the third and fourth stops are set as arbitrary (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D is possible). In this case, the correct answer pressing order can be set to 12 options. Further, when displaying the correct answer pressing order as an image, in the above example, the image may be displayed as “2 × 1 ×”. Then, after the stop switch 42C is operated, an image display such as “2 × − ×” may be given.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modified examples described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the original specification and the like of the present application include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 14, and in order to solve the problems to be solved by the initial invention and the problems according to the original invention, respectively. Means and effects of the first invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification does not mean that the invention is initially limited to inventions 1 to 14.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that does not execute processing relating to a game medium after a power failure occurs.
In a conventional gaming machine, by turning off a blocker before executing a backup process as a power-off process, even if a medal is inserted during the execution of the backup process, the medal is returned to the player via the blocker. Thus, a technique is known in which the medal addition processing is not performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, in the case where power is cut off at the moment when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot, the medal passes through the blocker before the power-off processing is executed, and the medal is counted. There was a possibility. Note that it is not preferable in terms of control to execute the medal addition process (medal bet process or medal credit process) after the power failure occurs.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the addition processing of the game media from being executed even when the power supply is cut off almost simultaneously with the insertion of the game media from the game media slot. .

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 1 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (first embodiment (A))
Game media slot (medal slot 47),
A state in which the passage of the game medium is permitted (on state) or a state in which the passage of the game medium is not permitted (off state) is provided in the passage (medal passage) of the game medium (medal) inserted from the game medium insertion slot. ) And a controllable blocker (45);
Detecting means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) provided in the passage of the game medium inserted from the game medium insertion port and capable of detecting the game medium (detection means B is located on the downstream side of detection means A). ) And,
From the time when the power supply is interrupted in a state where the blocker is controlled to permit the passage of the game medium, the event that the power supply is interrupted is detected, and A time until the blocker is controlled to a state where passage is not permitted is T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
When the game medium is released from the game medium insertion port toward the inside of the game machine in a state where the blocker is controlled to allow the passage of the game medium, the game medium cannot be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. From the time when it becomes possible (the position of M2 in FIG. 2), the detection means B detects the game medium and the detection means B no longer detects the game medium (the position of M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1 <T2
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, the power is cut off when the game medium is released from the game medium slot toward the inside of the game machine and the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine. In this case, before the game medium is no longer detected by the detection means B, an event that the power supply is cut off is detected and the blocker is controlled to a state where passage of the game medium is not permitted. , At least not detected by the detecting means B.
Therefore, the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, and therefore the game medium addition processing (bet processing and credit processing) is not executed. Therefore, even if the power supply is interrupted when the game media becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if the power interruption occurs immediately after the game media is released inside the gaming machine, Media can be rejected. Thus, it is possible to prevent the addition processing of the game media from being executed after the power-off.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 2 The initial invention relates to a gate trace of a board case in a gaming machine having a board case accommodating a control board therein.
In a conventional gaming machine, a board case accommodating a main control board therein is known. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, gate marks remain on the substrate case. Then, a technique using this gate mark as a mark has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2017-042270).
However, since the gate trace of the substrate case has a cut portion of the resin, it is unclear when viewed from the outside. For this reason, there is a problem that a gate mark may be opened and the inside of the main control substrate may be accessed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to suppress the gotting action using the gate trace of the substrate case.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 2 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (second embodiment)
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) having an arithmetic function;
A control board (main control board 50) on which the predetermined IC is mounted on one surface (a surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
A substrate case (a substrate case 56 composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) having a plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surfaces, etc.) and accommodating the control substrate;
The substrate case is formed such that the inside is visible,
A gate mark (57b) at the time of molding the substrate case is arranged on a surface (outside the upper surface of the upper cover 57) which is outside the substrate case and faces the one surface of the control substrate;
The predetermined IC of the control board is not positioned in a direction perpendicular to the surface facing the gate mark.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, since the predetermined IC of the control board is not located in the vertical direction of the gate trace of the substrate case, the gate trace is illegally opened to access the predetermined IC. Can be prevented.
Further, since there is no gate trace of the substrate case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being blocked by the gate trace. As a result, it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not a predetermined IC has been tampered with.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 The initial invention relates to processing performed when communication is restored after a disconnection has occurred in a communication between the main control board and the sub control board.
In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine that transmits a command from a main control board to a sub control board, and the sub control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command is known.
Here, a technique is known in which the sub-control board compares the previously received command with the currently received command and determines that the command reception is abnormal based on the consistency of the received commands (for example, JP 2014-226503 A).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board, a disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. When the communication is restored, the sub-control board may not be able to output a normal effect.
A problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to provide an appropriate effect when communication is restored after a disconnection has occurred between the main control board and the sub control board.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 3 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment)
A main control board (50);
A sub-control board (80) for controlling the effect based on the information received from the main control board,
The sub-control board can receive information on the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In a predetermined game state (AT), the sub-control board can output an effect corresponding to the operation of the operated stop switch based on receiving information of the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board,
In a case where a predetermined stop switch is operated at an “N” game item in the predetermined game state, when information that the predetermined stop switch is operated is received, a predetermined state corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. An effect (an effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch is stopped) is output, and thereafter, the information from the main control board becomes unreceivable before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated. After that, the information from the main control board can be received at the “N + a” game item, and thereafter, the information that the specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch is operated is received at the “N + a” game item At this time, the effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and the effect related to the predetermined effect (in the predetermined effect, When the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch is stopped, a predetermined stop information is output. After that, when predetermined information is received in the “N + a + 1” game item, based on the predetermined information, “ N + a + 1 "game effects are output.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, when communication is restored in the course of the “N + a” game, the effect related to the predetermined effect of the “N” game that has been output up to that time is output. Therefore, in the “N + a” game, an effect following the “N” game can be output. Then, when the game shifts to the “N + a + 1” game, the effect returns to the normal effect, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from suddenly changing due to the return of communication during the “N + a” game. As a result, it is possible to output an effect without a sense of incongruity before and after the occurrence of the disconnection.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of operating a stop switch at high speed.
In a conventional gaming machine, when a stop switch is operated, a reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to a lottery result. Further, after stopping the reel at a predetermined position, the motor is in an excited state for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or when the motor is in the excited state, the operation of the next stop switch is not accepted.
Here, a technique is known in which after the first stop switch is operated until the reel status is stopped, even if the second stop switch is operated, the stop operation is not accepted ( For example, see JP-A-2017-093576).
However, in the above-described conventional technology, there is a problem that if the time until the operation of the next stop switch becomes acceptable after the operation of the stop switch is long, the game cannot be played at a high speed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 4 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the fourth embodiment)
A reel (31);
A motor (32) for rotating the reel;
Reel control means (65) for controlling the drive of the motor and stopping the rotation of the reel based on the detection of the operation of the stop button (stop button 42a);
Internal lottery means (role lottery means 61)
The sensor (detection sensor 42e) for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest position (the position shown in FIG. 12C), and the stop is released when the stop button is released. The button is configured to be movable to an initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12A) by an urging force, and the sensor is turned off until the stop button moves to the initial position.
In a game in which the internal drawing means determines a predetermined result, the stop button is operated on a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under a situation in which all reels are rotating by the reel control means, and the predetermined After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) elapses from the excitation state. Is configured to end the excitation state when
T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) from the moment when the push of the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released until the sensor is turned off, and the predetermined time is T2,
T1 <T2
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is assumed that the start of the excitation state of the motor when the reel is stopped and the moment when the stop button is pushed to the deepest position are released. Sometimes, the excitation state ends after the sensor is turned off. Accordingly, the next stop button operation can be accepted at the timing when the motor excitation state ends.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 The initial invention relates to control of a medal payout device.
It is known that in a conventional gaming machine, it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, JP-A-2006-214434).
Here, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as a hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk. When a constant current is passed, the DC motor gradually accelerates from a state where the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped. Then, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
Therefore, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor is gradually accelerated from the start of the driving of the hopper motor to the discharge of the first medal. The required time is longer than the medal discharge interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, which may give the player the feeling that the discharge of the first medal is delayed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the first medal has been delayed.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 5 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (sixth embodiment)
A hopper (35) for storing medals,
A hopper disk (101) provided on the hopper;
A hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disk;
Control means (main control board 50) for controlling the driving of the hopper motor;
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality of (eight) holding portions (102) that can hold medals stored in the hopper along the outer periphery of the hopper disk,
When the hopper motor is driven to rotate the hopper disk, the medals held by the holding portion are formed to be sequentially discharged from a discharging portion (103),
The position of the holding unit where the last ejected medal was held at the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process was ejected from the ejecting unit is defined as a first position,
At the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting unit, the position of the holding unit holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is a second position,
The control means, when ending the one payout process, sets a state in which the holding unit holding the first discharge medal in the next payout process is located between a first position and a second position. The driving of the hopper motor is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, if the holding unit that holds the first ejected medals is stopped between the first position and the second position, it takes a long time to reach the first position. The distance is shorter than when stopping at the second position. As a result, the time required to reach the first position is shorter than when the motor is stopped at the second position. Therefore, even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor is gradually accelerated, the ejection of the first medal is delayed. The feeling can not be given to the player.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to the arrangement of a main control board mounted inside a cabinet and a sub-control board mounted on the back surface of a front door.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine provided with an electrolytic capacitor for power storage on a sub-control board for controlling an effect (for example, JP-A-2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic solution is charged in the electrolytic capacitor for power storage, but when the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a defect and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, The main CPU may malfunction. Further, there is a possibility that the main CPU may be damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor ruptures.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a problem and the electrolyte scatters. Another object is to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by an impact at that time even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a problem.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 6 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (seventh embodiment)
A cabinet (13),
A front door (12) openably and closably mounted on the cabinet;
A main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
And a sub-control board (80) for controlling the effect.
The main control board is mounted inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to a back surface of the front door,
The main control board and the sub control board are arranged so as to face each other in a state where the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
An electrolytic capacitor (86) is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board, the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a problem, and the electrolytic solution Can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU even if the main CPU is scattered, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Also, even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures, the impact can be prevented from being directly received by the main CPU, thereby preventing the main CPU from being damaged.

7. Initial Invention 7
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to stop control of the reels on the main control board side and control of the output of the effect on the sub control board side.
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect contents, and each effect content is determined when a special role is won (inside inside) and when no special role is won (non-inside inside). Are known with different selection probabilities (for example, JP 2013-146608 A).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the effect content is selected regardless of the result of the internal drawing in both inside and outside.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the result of the internal drawing.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 7 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (ninth embodiment)
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols,
A plurality of stop switches (42) operated by a player when stopping each of the reels;
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game,
And sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the effect.
The main control means includes:
Internal lottery that has a first lottery result (for example, "BB" single win during non-internal) or a second lottery result (for example, "non-win" inside BB) Means (role lottery means 61);
A plurality of stop position determination tables that determine the stop positions of the reels corresponding to the positions of the reels at the moment the stop switch is operated,
Reel control means (65) for determining a stop position of the reel using any one of the stop position determination tables, and stopping the reel at the determined stop position.
The reel control means determines a stop position of the reel using the same stop position determination table in a game in which a first drawing result is obtained and a game in which a second drawing result is obtained,
The sub-control means,
A plurality of effect determination tables that determine the effect to be output,
Effect output control means (91) for determining an effect to be output using any of the effect determination tables, and outputting the determined effect.
The effect output control means is configured to determine an effect to be output by using the different effect determination table for a game having a first drawing result and a game having a second drawing result.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, the reel control means on the main control means side has the same stop in the game in which the first drawing result and the game in which the second drawing result are obtained by the internal drawing means. The reel stop position is determined using the position determination table. On the sub-control means side, the effect output control means determines an effect to be output using a different effect determination table.
Thereby, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and the effects can be diversified.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 8 The first invention relates to a gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In a conventional gaming machine, a projecting side projecting outward is provided at an edge of an opening on a front side of a cabinet, and the projecting side is housed inside the front door when the front door is closed. Thus, there is known a device in which a gap between a cabinet and a front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign matter to enter (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door is opened slightly so that the protruding side is separated from the front door, and foreign matter enters through a gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to prevent a fraudulent act (going action) in which a front door is slightly opened to allow a foreign substance to enter through a gap between the cabinet and the front door.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 8 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (eighth embodiment)
A cabinet (13),
A front door (12) openably and closably mounted on the cabinet;
A door sensor for detecting opening of the front door,
A lower part of the cabinet is provided with a first closing part (13c) protruding toward the front door when the front door is closed,
At the lower part of the front door, below the first closing part, there is provided a second closing part (12a) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed,
A third closing portion (12b) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position above the first closing portion in a lower portion of the front door,
When the front door is closed, the first closing portion is formed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door is a detection start position,
The first closing part is formed between the second closing part and the third closing part even when the front door is at the detection start position.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, first, the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closing portion and the third closing portion are connected. The first closing portion will come out from between. Further, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it is possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, before the notification that the front door is open can be provided, the first blocking portion does not fall out from between the second blocking portion and the third blocking portion, and the notification that the front door is open is provided. Even at a position where it is possible, since the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a bent shape, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act (going action) of invading foreign matter from the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Original Invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section indicator.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section display has been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a gaming machine provided with a conventional advantageous section indicator, lighting control of the advantageous section indicator at the time of return from power-off has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator at the time of recovery from the power failure.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 9 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying an operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed;
An advantageous section indicator (advantage section display LED 77) indicating that the section is an advantageous section,
After the power supply is cut off under the condition that the advantageous section indicator is lit, when the power supply is restarted with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous section indicator is activated after the start of the interrupt process. The process for lighting can be executed,
A process for turning off the advantageous section indicator when the power supply is restarted while the setting change switch is on after the power supply is cut off in a situation where the advantageous section indicator is on. After executing the above, it is possible to shift to the setting change processing.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section indicator can be appropriately controlled according to the situation when returning from power-off.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine having four reels and a stop button.
Conventional gaming machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to reduce the number of reels and stop buttons to four in conventional gaming machines. However, when the number of stop buttons is set to four, there is a problem that an operation error of the stop button is likely to occur at the time of AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it difficult for the stop button to be operated incorrectly when the number of the stop buttons is four.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 10 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the thirteenth embodiment)
Four reels (31A-31D),
And four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to the four reels, respectively.
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is located vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
At least a part of the rightmost stop button (stop switch 42D) is located vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, even when the number of the stop buttons is four, the stop buttons at the left and right ends can be operated using the left and right ends of the operation button as markers. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for an operation error of the stop button to occur.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of indicating a prescribed number.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of playing a game with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine, an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number may occur even in a game which can be played with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers.
A problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable a game to be played with an appropriate prescribed number.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 11 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
Initial invention (twelfth embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying an operation mode of a stop button (stop switch 42);
When notifying the operation mode in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquisition number display LED 78),
In the notification game state, a game can be started when at least one of a plurality of prescribed numbers ("2" or "3") is entered.
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a prescribed number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit,
When the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit in the notification game state, a predetermined timing (from FIG. 42) until the start switch is turned on after all the reels stop. , Displayed in step S322),
When the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, the information corresponding to the operation mode is displayed in a display mode that can be identified (when the specified number is “2”, “0A” is displayed). Features.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, it is possible to display information corresponding to a specified number at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on. Thus, an appropriate prescribed number in the game can be notified.
Further, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode and the information corresponding to the prescribed number.

12. Original Invention 12
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 12 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in the notification gaming state.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine including a counter for counting the number of difference sheets during an AT (for example, see JP-A-2018-000797).
In a conventional gaming machine, at the end of an advantageous section, it is required to initialize information on the advantageous section. However, there is a case where the next AT is won soon after the end of the AT, and there is also a case where it is desired to carry over the difference number of the previous AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it possible to take over the difference number of the previous notification gaming state (AT) while initializing information on the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 12 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying an operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed;
In the first control means (main control board 50), the minimum value is a cumulative value of the difference between the bet number of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies hereinafter). A first difference counter (difference counter) that stores the value as "
A second control means (sub-control board 80) including a second difference counter (sub-difference counter) for storing an accumulated value of the difference indicating the difference between the bet number and the payout number of the game value;
At the end of the advantageous section, the first difference counter is cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the second difference counter is not cleared.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section, so that the rule of initializing information on the advantageous section can be complied with. In some cases, the second difference counter is not cleared. In such a case, it is possible to take over the difference number in the previous notification game state at the start of the next notification game state.

13. Original Invention 13
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 13 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in the notification gaming state.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine including a counter for counting the number of difference sheets during an AT (for example, see JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine, how to count (update) the difference number at the time of winning a replay has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number at the time of winning the replay.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 13 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed;
A difference counter that stores a cumulative value of the difference between the bet number of the game value and the payout (including the addition to the credit; the same applies hereinafter), the minimum value being “0”;
An advantageous section counter (an advantageous section clear counter) for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. At least in the game having won the small role, after stopping all the reels (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (see FIG. 41). 51 or 52, step S424),
1) If it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section, the advantageous section is determined without determining the value of the difference counter (without performing the processing of step S434). A process for ending (step S435) can be executed,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is not a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (when “No” in step S424), the update processing of the difference number counter (steps S428 and W429) is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (step S434). When it is determined that the value satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S434). ), The process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed,
2. In the game won in the replay, after stopping all the reels (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (FIG. 51). Or, in FIG. 52, step S424),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (when “Yes” in step S424), the value of the difference number counter is not determined (step S434). A process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section can be executed without executing the process,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is not a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (when “No” in step S424), the difference number counter is not updated and the difference number counter is not executed. Is determined to be a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (if “Yes” in step S426 in FIG. 51 or 52, the process proceeds to step S434), and a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section is determined. (When "Yes" in step S434), a process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, in the game won in the replay, the difference number counter is updated regardless of whether the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section. Is not executed, the process of updating the difference number in the game won in the replay can be appropriately executed. Further, the speed of the program processing can be increased.

14． Original invention 14
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a process related to an instruction function with a predetermined specified number.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having an instruction function has been known (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in the conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the prescribed number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately execute the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section according to the specified number.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 14 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) that can execute an instruction function of notifying an operation mode of a stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed,
An advantageous section counter (an advantageous section clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable relating to the advantageous section;
A notification game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, the number of games or difference number) related to the notification game state;
At least a first prescribed number (prescribed number “3”) or a second prescribed number (prescribed number “2”) of game values that can be inserted,
In the game (AT) of the advantageous section, in the game started based on the insertion of the first specified number, it is possible to execute a process related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct answer pressing order) (FIG. 48). , "Yes" in step S382), and in the game started based on the insertion of the second specified number, the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the notification game state, in a game started based on the insertion of the first specified number, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the notification game is performed. The counter can be updated (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the notification game state, in the game started based on the insertion of the second specified number, the update of the advantageous section counter can be performed (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the notification game counter is updated. Update cannot be executed ("No" in step S332 in FIG. 43).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated with any of the first prescribed number and the second prescribed number of games, so that the advantageous section can be optimized. .
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the processing related to the instruction function is not executable, the execution of the processing related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter may be consistent. it can.

10 slot machines (game machines)
Reference Signs List 11 power switch 12 front door 12a second closing portion 12b third closing portion 12c control panel 12d index 13 cabinet 13a bottom plate 13b back plate 13c first closing portion 14 symbol display device 14a reel frame 15 medal payout device 21 staging lamp 22 speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Discharge sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop Button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Adjustment switch 44a, 44b Closing sensor 45 Ca 46 passage sensor 47 medal slot 47a medal guard portion 47b medal placing unit 50 main control board (main control means)
50a Screw hole 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 PCB case (Main PCB case)
57 Upper cover 57a Caulking portion 57b Gate mark 57c Depressed portion 57d Projection 57e Projection 58 Lower cover 58a Caulking portion 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 61 Role drawing means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selecting means 64 Directing group number selecting means 65 reel control means 66 winning determination means 67 payout means 71 control command transmission means 73 set value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2-bet display LED
79c 3-bet display LED
79d game start display LED
79e Input LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
86 Electrolytic capacitor 87 Sub-substrate case 91 Effect output control means 101 Hopper disk 102 Holder 103 Ejector 110 Reel base 120 Reel control board 121 Reel board case

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (the configuration of a corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The present invention ( sixth embodiment)
A hopper (35) for storing medals,
A hopper disk (101) provided on the hopper;
A hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disk;
Drive control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor;
With
In a game in which the credit has reached an upper limit value ("50"), when a predetermined condition (a symbol combination corresponding to a small role has stopped on an active line) is satisfied, the drive control means drives the hopper motor. Is configured to execute a payout process capable of paying out medals,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality (eight) of holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper,
In a predetermined situation (a situation in which medals are stored in the hopper 35 and medals are held in the respective holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101), when the hopper motor is driven to rotate the hopper disk, the holding portion The formed medals are formed so as to be sequentially discharged from the discharge unit (103),
In the predetermined situation, the last discharge medal of the current game (medal with the letter “A” in FIGS. 17A and 17B) is discharged from the discharge unit by the payout process. The position of the holding unit where the ejected medals are held is referred to as a first position (a first position shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B).
In the predetermined situation, the first discharge medal that can be discharged in the next payout processing at the moment when the last discharge medal of the current game is discharged from the discharge unit by the payout processing (“in FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B, The position of the holding unit that holds the medal with the letter “B”) is a second position (a second position shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B),
When the payout process is completed and the hopper disk stops, the hopper is held in a state where the holding unit holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. It is designed to stop the rotation of the disk.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (the configuration of a corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The present invention (sixth embodiment)
A hopper (35) for storing medals,
A hopper disk (101) provided on the hopper;
A hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disk;
Drive control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor;
In a game in which the credit has reached an upper limit value ("50"), when a predetermined condition (a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination has stopped on an active line) is satisfied, the drive control means drives the hopper motor. Is configured to execute a payout process capable of paying out medals,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality (eight) of holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper,
Certain circumstances in (medals stored in the hopper 35, the respective holding portions 102 of the hopper disc 101 situations medal is held), when the hopper disc the hopper motor is driven to rotate, holding portion Is formed so that the medals held in the storage section pass through a discharge path (a path from the holding section to the discharge section ) and are sequentially discharged from the discharge section (103).
The moment when the last ejected medal of this game (the medal marked with the letter “A” in FIGS. 17A and 17B) is ejected from the ejecting unit by the payout process executed in the predetermined situation. The position of the holding portion where the last ejected medal is held is referred to as a first position (a first position shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B),
The first discharge medal that can be discharged in the next payout process at the moment when the last discharge medal of the current game is discharged from the discharge unit by the payout process executed in the predetermined situation (FIGS. 17A and 17B) ), The position of the holding unit that holds the medal with the letter “B”) is the second position (the second position shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B),
When the payout process executed in the predetermined situation ends and the rotation of the hopper disk stops, the holding unit holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is moved to the first position and the second position. And a predetermined portion of the hopper disk (a portion corresponding to a position between two adjacent holding portions) blocks at least a part of the discharge path .

Claims (1)

A notification game state that can notify the operation mode of the stop button is provided,
When notifying the operation mode in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode can be displayed on a predetermined display unit,
In the notification game state, it is possible to start a game when at least one of a plurality of specified numbers of game values is inserted,
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a prescribed number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit,
In the notification game state, when information corresponding to a specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, the information is displayed at a predetermined timing after all the reels have stopped until the start switch is detected to be on,
When the information corresponding to the prescribed number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, the information is displayed in a display mode that can be identified from the information corresponding to the operation mode.